xref: /dragonfly/contrib/cvs-1.12/src/rcs.c (revision 36a3d1d6)
1 /*
2  * Copyright (C) 1986-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3  *
4  * Portions Copyright (C) 1998-2005 Derek Price, Ximbiot <http://ximbiot.com>,
5  *                                  and others.
6  *
7  * Portions Copyright (C) 1992, Brian Berliner and Jeff Polk
8  * Portions Copyright (C) 1989-1992, Brian Berliner
9  *
10  * You may distribute under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
11  * specified in the README file that comes with the CVS source distribution.
12  *
13  * The routines contained in this file do all the rcs file parsing and
14  * manipulation
15  */
16 
17 #include "cvs.h"
18 #include "edit.h"
19 #include "hardlink.h"
20 
21 /* These need to be source after cvs.h or HAVE_MMAP won't be set... */
22 #ifdef HAVE_MMAP
23 # include "getpagesize.h"
24 # include <sys/mman.h>
25 
26 /* Define MAP_FILE when it isn't otherwise.  */
27 # ifndef MAP_FILE
28 #  define MAP_FILE 0
29 # endif
30 /* Define MAP_FAILED for old systems which neglect to.  */
31 # ifndef MAP_FAILED
32 #  define MAP_FAILED ((void *)-1)
33 # endif
34 #endif
35 
36 /* The RCS -k options, and a set of enums that must match the array.
37    These come first so that we can use enum kflag in function
38    prototypes.  */
39 static const char *const kflags[] =
40   {"kv", "kvl", "k", "v", "o", "b", NULL};
41 enum kflag { KFLAG_KV = 0, KFLAG_KVL, KFLAG_K, KFLAG_V, KFLAG_O, KFLAG_B };
42 
43 /* A structure we use to buffer the contents of an RCS file.  The
44    various fields are only referenced directly by the rcsbuf_*
45    functions.  We declare the struct here so that we can allocate it
46    on the stack, rather than in memory.  */
47 
48 struct rcsbuffer
49 {
50     /* Points to the current position in the buffer.  */
51     char *ptr;
52     /* Points just after the last valid character in the buffer.  */
53     char *ptrend;
54     /* The file.  */
55     FILE *fp;
56     /* The name of the file, used for error messages.  */
57     const char *filename;
58     /* The starting file position of the data in the buffer.  */
59     unsigned long pos;
60     /* The length of the value.  */
61     size_t vlen;
62     /* Whether the value contains an '@' string.  If so, we can not
63        compress whitespace characters.  */
64     int at_string;
65     /* The number of embedded '@' characters in an '@' string.  If
66        this is non-zero, we must search the string for pairs of '@'
67        and convert them to a single '@'.  */
68     int embedded_at;
69 };
70 
71 static RCSNode *RCS_parsercsfile_i (FILE * fp, const char *rcsfile);
72 static char *RCS_getdatebranch (RCSNode * rcs, const char *date,
73                                 const char *branch);
74 static void rcsbuf_open (struct rcsbuffer *, FILE *fp,
75                          const char *filename, unsigned long pos);
76 static void rcsbuf_close (struct rcsbuffer *);
77 static int rcsbuf_getkey (struct rcsbuffer *, char **keyp, char **valp);
78 static int rcsbuf_getrevnum (struct rcsbuffer *, char **revp);
79 static char *rcsbuf_fill (struct rcsbuffer *, char *ptr, char **keyp,
80                           char **valp);
81 static int rcsbuf_valcmp (struct rcsbuffer *);
82 static char *rcsbuf_valcopy (struct rcsbuffer *, char *val, int polish,
83                              size_t *lenp);
84 static void rcsbuf_valpolish (struct rcsbuffer *, char *val, int polish,
85                               size_t *lenp);
86 static void rcsbuf_valpolish_internal (struct rcsbuffer *, char *to,
87                                        const char *from, size_t *lenp);
88 static off_t rcsbuf_ftello (struct rcsbuffer *);
89 static void rcsbuf_get_buffered (struct rcsbuffer *, char **datap,
90 				 size_t *lenp);
91 static void rcsbuf_cache (RCSNode *, struct rcsbuffer *);
92 static void rcsbuf_cache_close (void);
93 static void rcsbuf_cache_open (RCSNode *, off_t, FILE **, struct rcsbuffer *);
94 static int checkmagic_proc (Node *p, void *closure);
95 static void do_branches (List * list, char *val);
96 static void do_symbols (List * list, char *val);
97 static void do_locks (List * list, char *val);
98 static void free_rcsnode_contents (RCSNode *);
99 static void free_rcsvers_contents (RCSVers *);
100 static void rcsvers_delproc (Node * p);
101 static char *translate_symtag (RCSNode *, const char *);
102 static char *RCS_addbranch (RCSNode *, const char *);
103 static char *truncate_revnum_in_place (char *);
104 static char *truncate_revnum (const char *);
105 static char *printable_date (const char *);
106 static char *escape_keyword_value (const char *, int *);
107 static void expand_keywords (RCSNode *, RCSVers *, const char *,
108                              const char *, size_t, enum kflag, char *,
109                              size_t, char **, size_t *);
110 static void cmp_file_buffer (void *, const char *, size_t);
111 
112 /* Routines for reading, parsing and writing RCS files. */
113 static RCSVers *getdelta (struct rcsbuffer *, char *, char **, char **);
114 static Deltatext *RCS_getdeltatext (RCSNode *, FILE *, struct rcsbuffer *);
115 static void freedeltatext (Deltatext *);
116 
117 static void RCS_putadmin (RCSNode *, FILE *);
118 static void RCS_putdtree (RCSNode *, char *, FILE *);
119 static void RCS_putdesc (RCSNode *, FILE *);
120 static void putdelta (RCSVers *, FILE *);
121 static int putrcsfield_proc (Node *, void *);
122 static int putsymbol_proc (Node *, void *);
123 static void RCS_copydeltas (RCSNode *, FILE *, struct rcsbuffer *, FILE *,
124 			    Deltatext *, char *);
125 static int count_delta_actions (Node *, void *);
126 static void putdeltatext (FILE *, Deltatext *);
127 
128 static FILE *rcs_internal_lockfile (char *);
129 static void rcs_internal_unlockfile (FILE *, char *);
130 static char *rcs_lockfilename (const char *);
131 
132 /* The RCS file reading functions are called a lot, and they do some
133    string comparisons.  This macro speeds things up a bit by skipping
134    the function call when the first characters are different.  It
135    evaluates its arguments multiple times.  */
136 #define STREQ(a, b) (*(char *)(a) == *(char *)(b) && strcmp ((a), (b)) == 0)
137 
138 static char * getfullCVSname (char *, char **);
139 
140 /*
141  * We don't want to use isspace() from the C library because:
142  *
143  * 1. The definition of "whitespace" in RCS files includes ASCII
144  *    backspace, but the C locale doesn't.
145  * 2. isspace is an very expensive function call in some implementations
146  *    due to the addition of wide character support.
147  */
148 static const char spacetab[] = {
149         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0,	/* 0x00 - 0x0f */
150         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x10 - 0x1f */
151         1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x20 - 0x2f */
152         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x30 - 0x3f */
153         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x40 - 0x4f */
154         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x50 - 0x5f */
155         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x60 - 0x8f */
156         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x70 - 0x7f */
157         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x80 - 0x8f */
158         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x90 - 0x9f */
159         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0xa0 - 0xaf */
160         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0xb0 - 0xbf */
161         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0xc0 - 0xcf */
162         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0xd0 - 0xdf */
163         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0xe0 - 0xef */
164         0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0  /* 0xf0 - 0xff */
165 };
166 
167 #define whitespace(c)	(spacetab[(unsigned char)c] != 0)
168 
169 static char *rcs_lockfile = NULL;
170 static int rcs_lockfd = -1;
171 
172 
173 
174 /*
175  * char *
176  * locate_rcs ( const char* file, const char *repository , int *inattic )
177  *
178  * Find an RCS file in the repository, case insensitively when the cased name
179  * doesn't exist, we are running as the server, and a client has asked us to
180  * ignore case.
181  *
182  * Most parts of CVS will want to rely instead on RCS_parse which calls this
183  * function and is called by recurse.c which then puts the result in useful
184  * places like the rcs field of struct file_info.
185  *
186  * INPUTS
187  *
188  *  repository		the repository (including the directory)
189  *  file		the filename within that directory (without RCSEXT).
190  *  inattic		NULL or a pointer to the output boolean
191  *
192  * OUTPUTS
193  *
194  *  inattic		If this input was non-null, the destination will be
195  *  			set to true if the file was found in the attic or
196  *  			false if not.  If no RCS file is found, this value
197  *  			is undefined.
198  *
199  * RETURNS
200  *
201  *  a newly-malloc'd array containing the absolute pathname of the RCS
202  *  file that was found or NULL when none was found.
203  *
204  * ERRORS
205  *
206  *  errno can be set by the return value of the final call to
207  *  locate_file_in_dir().  This should resolve to the system's existence error
208  *  value (sometime ENOENT) if the Attic directory did not exist and ENOENT if
209  *  the Attic was found but no matching files were found in the Attic or its
210  *  parent.
211  */
212 static char *
213 locate_rcs (const char *repository, const char *file, int *inattic)
214 {
215     char *retval;
216 
217     /* First, try to find the file as cased. */
218     retval = xmalloc (strlen (repository)
219                       + sizeof (CVSATTIC)
220                       + strlen (file)
221                       + sizeof (RCSEXT)
222                       + 3);
223     sprintf (retval, "%s/%s%s", repository, file, RCSEXT);
224     if (isreadable (retval))
225     {
226 	if (inattic)
227 	    *inattic = 0;
228 	return retval;
229     }
230     sprintf (retval, "%s/%s/%s%s", repository, CVSATTIC, file, RCSEXT);
231     if (isreadable (retval))
232     {
233 	if (inattic)
234 	    *inattic = 1;
235 	return retval;
236     }
237     free (retval);
238 
239     return NULL;
240 }
241 
242 
243 
244 /* A few generic thoughts on error handling, in particular the
245    printing of unexpected characters that we find in the RCS file
246    (that is, why we use '\x%x' rather than %c or some such).
247 
248    * Avoiding %c means we don't have to worry about what is printable
249    and other such stuff.  In error handling, often better to keep it
250    simple.
251 
252    * Hex rather than decimal or octal because character set standards
253    tend to use hex.
254 
255    * Saying "character 0x%x" might make it sound like we are printing
256    a file offset.  So we use '\x%x'.
257 
258    * Would be nice to print the offset within the file, but I can
259    imagine various portability hassles (in particular, whether
260    unsigned long is always big enough to hold file offsets).  */
261 
262 /* Parse an rcsfile given a user file name and a repository.  If there is
263    an error, we print an error message and return NULL.  If the file
264    does not exist, we return NULL without printing anything (I'm not
265    sure this allows the caller to do anything reasonable, but it is
266    the current behavior).  */
267 RCSNode *
268 RCS_parse (const char *file, const char *repos)
269 {
270     RCSNode *rcs;
271     FILE *fp;
272     RCSNode *retval = NULL;
273     char *rcsfile;
274     int inattic;
275 
276     /* We're creating a new RCSNode, so there is no hope of finding it
277        in the cache.  */
278     rcsbuf_cache_close ();
279 
280     if (!(rcsfile = locate_rcs (repos, file, &inattic)))
281     {
282 	/* Handle the error cases */
283     }
284     else if ((fp = CVS_FOPEN (rcsfile, FOPEN_BINARY_READ)))
285     {
286 	rcs = RCS_parsercsfile_i (fp, rcsfile);
287 	if (rcs)
288 	{
289 	    rcs->flags |= VALID;
290 	    if (inattic)
291 		rcs->flags |= INATTIC;
292 	}
293 
294 	free (rcsfile);
295 	retval = rcs;
296     }
297     else if (!existence_error (errno))
298     {
299 	error (0, errno, "cannot open `%s'", rcsfile);
300 	free (rcsfile);
301     }
302 
303     return retval;
304 }
305 
306 
307 
308 /*
309  * Parse a specific rcsfile.
310  */
311 RCSNode *
312 RCS_parsercsfile (const char *rcsfile)
313 {
314     FILE *fp;
315     RCSNode *rcs;
316 
317     /* We're creating a new RCSNode, so there is no hope of finding it
318        in the cache.  */
319     rcsbuf_cache_close ();
320 
321     /* open the rcsfile */
322     if ((fp = CVS_FOPEN (rcsfile, FOPEN_BINARY_READ)) == NULL)
323     {
324 	error (0, errno, "Couldn't open rcs file `%s'", rcsfile);
325 	return NULL;
326     }
327 
328     rcs = RCS_parsercsfile_i (fp, rcsfile);
329 
330     return rcs;
331 }
332 
333 
334 
335 /*
336  */
337 static RCSNode *
338 RCS_parsercsfile_i (FILE *fp, const char *rcsfile)
339 {
340     RCSNode *rdata;
341     struct rcsbuffer rcsbuf;
342     char *key, *value;
343 
344     /* make a node */
345     rdata = xmalloc (sizeof (RCSNode));
346     memset (rdata, 0, sizeof (RCSNode));
347     rdata->refcount = 1;
348     rdata->path = xstrdup (rcsfile);
349     rdata->print_path = xstrdup (primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsfile));
350 
351     /* Process HEAD, BRANCH, and EXPAND keywords from the RCS header.
352 
353        Most cvs operations on the main branch don't need any more
354        information.  Those that do call RCS_reparsercsfile to parse
355        the rest of the header and the deltas.  */
356 
357     rcsbuf_open (&rcsbuf, fp, rcsfile, 0);
358 
359     if (! rcsbuf_getkey (&rcsbuf, &key, &value))
360 	goto l_error;
361     if (STREQ (key, RCSDESC))
362 	goto l_error;
363 
364     if (STREQ (RCSHEAD, key) && value != NULL)
365 	rdata->head = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
366 
367     if (! rcsbuf_getkey (&rcsbuf, &key, &value))
368 	goto l_error;
369     if (STREQ (key, RCSDESC))
370 	goto l_error;
371 
372     if (STREQ (RCSBRANCH, key) && value != NULL)
373     {
374 	char *cp;
375 
376 	rdata->branch = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
377 	if ((numdots (rdata->branch) & 1) != 0)
378 	{
379 	    /* turn it into a branch if it's a revision */
380 	    cp = strrchr (rdata->branch, '.');
381 	    *cp = '\0';
382 	}
383     }
384 
385     /* Look ahead for expand, stopping when we see desc or a revision
386        number.  */
387     while (1)
388     {
389 	char *cp;
390 
391 	if (STREQ (RCSEXPAND, key))
392 	{
393 	    rdata->expand = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
394 	    break;
395 	}
396 
397 	for (cp = key;
398 	     (isdigit ((unsigned char)*cp) || *cp == '.') && *cp != '\0';
399 	     cp++)
400 	    /* do nothing */ ;
401 	if (*cp == '\0')
402 	    break;
403 
404 	if (STREQ (RCSDESC, key))
405 	    break;
406 
407 	if (! rcsbuf_getkey (&rcsbuf, &key, &value))
408 	    break;
409     }
410 
411     rdata->flags |= PARTIAL;
412 
413     rcsbuf_cache (rdata, &rcsbuf);
414 
415     return rdata;
416 
417 l_error:
418     error (0, 0, "`%s' does not appear to be a valid rcs file",
419 	   rcsfile);
420     rcsbuf_close (&rcsbuf);
421     freercsnode (&rdata);
422     fclose (fp);
423     return NULL;
424 }
425 
426 
427 
428 /* Do the real work of parsing an RCS file.
429 
430    On error, die with a fatal error; if it returns at all it was successful.
431 
432    If PFP is NULL, close the file when done.  Otherwise, leave it open
433    and store the FILE * in *PFP.  */
434 void
435 RCS_reparsercsfile (RCSNode *rdata, FILE **pfp, struct rcsbuffer *rcsbufp)
436 {
437     FILE *fp;
438     char *rcsfile;
439     struct rcsbuffer rcsbuf;
440     Node *q, *kv;
441     RCSVers *vnode;
442     int gotkey;
443     char *cp;
444     char *key, *value;
445 
446     assert (rdata != NULL);
447     rcsfile = rdata->path;
448 
449     rcsbuf_cache_open (rdata, 0, &fp, &rcsbuf);
450 
451     /* make a node */
452     /* This probably shouldn't be done until later: if a file has an
453        empty revision tree (which is permissible), rdata->versions
454        should be NULL. -twp */
455     rdata->versions = getlist ();
456 
457     /*
458      * process all the special header information, break out when we get to
459      * the first revision delta
460      */
461     gotkey = 0;
462     for (;;)
463     {
464 	/* get the next key/value pair */
465 	if (!gotkey)
466 	{
467 	    if (! rcsbuf_getkey (&rcsbuf, &key, &value))
468 	    {
469 		error (1, 0, "`%s' does not appear to be a valid rcs file",
470 		       rcsfile);
471 	    }
472 	}
473 
474 	gotkey = 0;
475 
476 	/* Skip head, branch and expand tags; we already have them. */
477 	if (STREQ (key, RCSHEAD)
478 	    || STREQ (key, RCSBRANCH)
479 	    || STREQ (key, RCSEXPAND))
480 	{
481 	    continue;
482 	}
483 
484 	if (STREQ (key, "access"))
485 	{
486 	    if (value != NULL)
487 	    {
488 		/* We pass the POLISH parameter as 1 because
489                    RCS_addaccess expects nothing but spaces.  FIXME:
490                    It would be easy and more efficient to change
491                    RCS_addaccess.  */
492 		if (rdata->access)
493 		{
494 		    error (0, 0,
495 		           "Duplicate `access' keyword found in RCS file.");
496 		    free (rdata->access);
497 		}
498 		rdata->access = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, 1, NULL);
499 	    }
500 	    continue;
501 	}
502 
503 	/* We always save lock information, so that we can handle
504            -kkvl correctly when checking out a file. */
505 	if (STREQ (key, "locks"))
506 	{
507 	    if (value != NULL)
508 	    {
509 		if (rdata->locks_data)
510 		{
511 		    error (0, 0,
512 		           "Duplicate `locks' keyword found in RCS file.");
513 		    free (rdata->locks_data);
514 		}
515 		rdata->locks_data = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
516 	    }
517 	    if (! rcsbuf_getkey (&rcsbuf, &key, &value))
518 	    {
519 		error (1, 0, "premature end of file reading %s", rcsfile);
520 	    }
521 	    if (STREQ (key, "strict") && value == NULL)
522 	    {
523 		rdata->strict_locks = 1;
524 	    }
525 	    else
526 		gotkey = 1;
527 	    continue;
528 	}
529 
530 	if (STREQ (RCSSYMBOLS, key))
531 	{
532 	    if (value != NULL)
533 	    {
534 		if (rdata->symbols_data)
535 		{
536 		    error (0, 0,
537 		           "Duplicate `%s' keyword found in RCS file.",
538 		           RCSSYMBOLS);
539 		    free (rdata->symbols_data);
540 		}
541 		rdata->symbols_data = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
542 	    }
543 	    continue;
544 	}
545 
546 	/*
547 	 * check key for '.''s and digits (probably a rev) if it is a
548 	 * revision or `desc', we are done with the headers and are down to the
549 	 * revision deltas, so we break out of the loop
550 	 */
551 	for (cp = key;
552 	     (isdigit ((unsigned char) *cp) || *cp == '.') && *cp != '\0';
553 	     cp++)
554 	     /* do nothing */ ;
555 	/* Note that when comparing with RCSDATE, we are not massaging
556            VALUE from the string found in the RCS file.  This is OK
557            since we know exactly what to expect.  */
558 	if (*cp == '\0' && strncmp (RCSDATE, value, (sizeof RCSDATE) - 1) == 0)
559 	    break;
560 
561 	if (STREQ (key, RCSDESC))
562 	    break;
563 
564 	if (STREQ (key, "comment"))
565 	{
566 	    if (rdata->comment)
567 	    {
568 		error (0, 0,
569 		       "warning: duplicate key `%s' in RCS file `%s'",
570 		       key, rcsfile);
571 		free (rdata->comment);
572 	    }
573 	    rdata->comment = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
574 	    continue;
575 	}
576 	if (rdata->other == NULL)
577 	    rdata->other = getlist ();
578 	kv = getnode ();
579 	kv->type = rcsbuf_valcmp (&rcsbuf) ? RCSCMPFLD : RCSFIELD;
580 	kv->key = xstrdup (key);
581 	kv->data = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, kv->type == RCSFIELD, NULL);
582 	if (addnode (rdata->other, kv) != 0)
583 	{
584 	    error (0, 0, "warning: duplicate key `%s' in RCS file `%s'",
585 		   key, rcsfile);
586 	    freenode (kv);
587 	}
588 
589 	/* if we haven't grabbed it yet, we didn't want it */
590     }
591 
592     /* We got out of the loop, so we have the first part of the first
593        revision delta in KEY (the revision) and VALUE (the date key
594        and its value).  This is what getdelta expects to receive.  */
595 
596     while ((vnode = getdelta (&rcsbuf, rcsfile, &key, &value)) != NULL)
597     {
598 	/* get the node */
599 	q = getnode ();
600 	q->type = RCSVERS;
601 	q->delproc = rcsvers_delproc;
602 	q->data = vnode;
603 	q->key = vnode->version;
604 
605 	/* add the nodes to the list */
606 	if (addnode (rdata->versions, q) != 0)
607 	{
608 #if 0
609 		purify_printf("WARNING: Adding duplicate version: %s (%s)\n",
610 			 q->key, rcsfile);
611 		freenode (q);
612 #endif
613 	}
614     }
615 
616     /* Here KEY and VALUE are whatever caused getdelta to return NULL.  */
617 
618     if (STREQ (key, RCSDESC))
619     {
620 	if (rdata->desc != NULL)
621 	{
622 	    error (0, 0,
623 		   "warning: duplicate key `%s' in RCS file `%s'",
624 		   key, rcsfile);
625 	    free (rdata->desc);
626 	}
627 	rdata->desc = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, 1, NULL);
628     }
629 
630     rdata->delta_pos = rcsbuf_ftello (&rcsbuf);
631 
632     if (pfp == NULL)
633 	rcsbuf_cache (rdata, &rcsbuf);
634     else
635     {
636 	*pfp = fp;
637 	*rcsbufp = rcsbuf;
638     }
639     rdata->flags &= ~PARTIAL;
640 }
641 
642 
643 
644 /* Move RCS into or out of the Attic, depending on TOATTIC.  If the
645    file is already in the desired place, return without doing
646    anything.  At some point may want to think about how this relates
647    to RCS_rewrite but that is a bit hairy (if one wants renames to be
648    atomic, or that kind of thing).  If there is an error, print a message
649    and return 1.  On success, return 0.  */
650 int
651 RCS_setattic (RCSNode *rcs, int toattic)
652 {
653     char *newpath;
654     const char *p;
655     char *q;
656 
657     /* Some systems aren't going to let us rename an open file.  */
658     rcsbuf_cache_close ();
659 
660     /* Could make the pathname computations in this file, and probably
661        in other parts of rcs.c too, easier if the REPOS and FILE
662        arguments to RCS_parse got stashed in the RCSNode.  */
663 
664     if (toattic)
665     {
666 	mode_t omask;
667 
668 	if (rcs->flags & INATTIC)
669 	    return 0;
670 
671 	/* Example: rcs->path is "/foo/bar/baz,v".  */
672 	newpath = xmalloc (strlen (rcs->path) + sizeof CVSATTIC + 5);
673 	p = last_component (rcs->path);
674 	strncpy (newpath, rcs->path, p - rcs->path);
675 	strcpy (newpath + (p - rcs->path), CVSATTIC);
676 
677 	/* Create the Attic directory if it doesn't exist.  */
678 	omask = umask (cvsumask);
679 	if (CVS_MKDIR (newpath, 0777) < 0 && errno != EEXIST)
680 	    error (0, errno, "cannot make directory %s", newpath);
681 	(void) umask (omask);
682 
683 	strcat (newpath, "/");
684 	strcat (newpath, p);
685 
686 	if (CVS_RENAME (rcs->path, newpath) < 0)
687 	{
688 	    int save_errno = errno;
689 
690 	    /* The checks for isreadable look awfully fishy, but
691 	       I'm going to leave them here for now until I
692 	       can think harder about whether they take care of
693 	       some cases which should be handled somehow.  */
694 
695 	    if (isreadable (rcs->path) || !isreadable (newpath))
696 	    {
697 		error (0, save_errno, "cannot rename %s to %s",
698 		       rcs->path, newpath);
699 		free (newpath);
700 		return 1;
701 	    }
702 	}
703     }
704     else
705     {
706 	if (!(rcs->flags & INATTIC))
707 	    return 0;
708 
709 	newpath = xmalloc (strlen (rcs->path));
710 
711 	/* Example: rcs->path is "/foo/bar/Attic/baz,v".  */
712 	p = last_component (rcs->path);
713 	strncpy (newpath, rcs->path, p - rcs->path - 1);
714 	newpath[p - rcs->path - 1] = '\0';
715 	q = newpath + (p - rcs->path - 1) - (sizeof CVSATTIC - 1);
716 	assert (strncmp (q, CVSATTIC, sizeof CVSATTIC - 1) == 0);
717 	strcpy (q, p);
718 
719 	if (CVS_RENAME (rcs->path, newpath) < 0)
720 	{
721 	    error (0, errno, "failed to move `%s' out of the attic",
722 		   rcs->path);
723 	    free (newpath);
724 	    return 1;
725 	}
726     }
727 
728     free (rcs->path);
729     rcs->path = newpath;
730 
731     return 0;
732 }
733 
734 
735 
736 /*
737  * Fully parse the RCS file.  Store all keyword/value pairs, fetch the
738  * log messages for each revision, and fetch add and delete counts for
739  * each revision (we could fetch the entire text for each revision,
740  * but the only caller, log_fileproc, doesn't need that information,
741  * so we don't waste the memory required to store it).  The add and
742  * delete counts are stored on the OTHER field of the RCSVERSNODE
743  * structure, under the names ";add" and ";delete", so that we don't
744  * waste the memory space of extra fields in RCSVERSNODE for code
745  * which doesn't need this information.
746  */
747 void
748 RCS_fully_parse (RCSNode *rcs)
749 {
750     FILE *fp;
751     struct rcsbuffer rcsbuf;
752 
753     RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, &fp, &rcsbuf);
754 
755     while (1)
756     {
757 	char *key, *value;
758 	Node *vers;
759 	RCSVers *vnode;
760 
761 	/* Rather than try to keep track of how much information we
762            have read, just read to the end of the file.  */
763 	if (!rcsbuf_getrevnum (&rcsbuf, &key))
764 	    break;
765 
766 	vers = findnode (rcs->versions, key);
767 	if (vers == NULL)
768 	    error (1, 0,
769 		   "mismatch in rcs file %s between deltas and deltatexts (%s)",
770 		   rcs->print_path, key);
771 
772 	vnode = vers->data;
773 
774 	while (rcsbuf_getkey (&rcsbuf, &key, &value))
775 	{
776 	    if (!STREQ (key, "text"))
777 	    {
778 		Node *kv;
779 
780 		if (vnode->other == NULL)
781 		    vnode->other = getlist ();
782 		kv = getnode ();
783 		kv->type = rcsbuf_valcmp (&rcsbuf) ? RCSCMPFLD : RCSFIELD;
784 		kv->key = xstrdup (key);
785 		kv->data = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, kv->type == RCSFIELD,
786 					   NULL);
787 		if (addnode (vnode->other, kv) != 0)
788 		{
789 		    error (0, 0,
790 			   "\
791 warning: duplicate key `%s' in version `%s' of RCS file `%s'",
792 			   key, vnode->version, rcs->print_path);
793 		    freenode (kv);
794 		}
795 
796 		continue;
797 	    }
798 
799 	    if (!STREQ (vnode->version, rcs->head))
800 	    {
801 		unsigned long add, del;
802 		char buf[50];
803 		Node *kv;
804 
805 		/* This is a change text.  Store the add and delete
806                    counts.  */
807 		add = 0;
808 		del = 0;
809 		if (value != NULL)
810 		{
811 		    size_t vallen;
812 		    const char *cp;
813 
814 		    rcsbuf_valpolish (&rcsbuf, value, 0, &vallen);
815 		    cp = value;
816 		    while (cp < value + vallen)
817 		    {
818 			char op;
819 			unsigned long count;
820 
821 			op = *cp++;
822 			if (op != 'a' && op  != 'd')
823 			    error (1, 0, "\
824 unrecognized operation '\\x%x' in %s",
825 				   op, rcs->print_path);
826 			(void) strtoul (cp, (char **) &cp, 10);
827 			if (*cp++ != ' ')
828 			    error (1, 0, "space expected in %s revision %s",
829 				   rcs->print_path, vnode->version);
830 			count = strtoul (cp, (char **) &cp, 10);
831 			if (*cp++ != '\012')
832 			    error (1, 0, "linefeed expected in %s revision %s",
833 				   rcs->print_path, vnode->version);
834 
835 			if (op == 'd')
836 			    del += count;
837 			else
838 			{
839 			    add += count;
840 			    while (count != 0)
841 			    {
842 				if (*cp == '\012')
843 				    --count;
844 				else if (cp == value + vallen)
845 				{
846 				    if (count != 1)
847 					error (1, 0, "\
848 premature end of value in %s revision %s",
849 					       rcs->print_path, vnode->version);
850 				    else
851 					break;
852 				}
853 				++cp;
854 			    }
855 			}
856 		    }
857 		}
858 
859 		sprintf (buf, "%lu", add);
860 		kv = getnode ();
861 		kv->type = RCSFIELD;
862 		kv->key = xstrdup (";add");
863 		kv->data = xstrdup (buf);
864 		if (addnode (vnode->other, kv) != 0)
865 		{
866 		    error (0, 0,
867 			   "\
868 warning: duplicate key `%s' in version `%s' of RCS file `%s'",
869 			   key, vnode->version, rcs->print_path);
870 		    freenode (kv);
871 		}
872 
873 		sprintf (buf, "%lu", del);
874 		kv = getnode ();
875 		kv->type = RCSFIELD;
876 		kv->key = xstrdup (";delete");
877 		kv->data = xstrdup (buf);
878 		if (addnode (vnode->other, kv) != 0)
879 		{
880 		    error (0, 0,
881 			   "\
882 warning: duplicate key `%s' in version `%s' of RCS file `%s'",
883 			   key, vnode->version, rcs->print_path);
884 		    freenode (kv);
885 		}
886 	    }
887 
888 	    /* We have found the "text" key which ends the data for
889                this revision.  Break out of the loop and go on to the
890                next revision.  */
891 	    break;
892 	}
893     }
894 
895     rcsbuf_cache (rcs, &rcsbuf);
896 }
897 
898 
899 
900 /*
901  * freercsnode - free up the info for an RCSNode
902  */
903 void
904 freercsnode (RCSNode **rnodep)
905 {
906     if (rnodep == NULL || *rnodep == NULL)
907 	return;
908 
909     ((*rnodep)->refcount)--;
910     if ((*rnodep)->refcount != 0)
911     {
912 	*rnodep = NULL;
913 	return;
914     }
915     free ((*rnodep)->path);
916     free ((*rnodep)->print_path);
917     if ((*rnodep)->head != NULL)
918 	free ((*rnodep)->head);
919     if ((*rnodep)->branch != NULL)
920 	free ((*rnodep)->branch);
921     free_rcsnode_contents (*rnodep);
922     free (*rnodep);
923     *rnodep = NULL;
924 }
925 
926 
927 
928 /*
929  * free_rcsnode_contents - free up the contents of an RCSNode without
930  * freeing the node itself, or the file name, or the head, or the
931  * path.  This returns the RCSNode to the state it is in immediately
932  * after a call to RCS_parse.
933  */
934 static void
935 free_rcsnode_contents (RCSNode *rnode)
936 {
937     dellist (&rnode->versions);
938     if (rnode->symbols != NULL)
939 	dellist (&rnode->symbols);
940     if (rnode->symbols_data != NULL)
941 	free (rnode->symbols_data);
942     if (rnode->expand != NULL)
943 	free (rnode->expand);
944     if (rnode->other != NULL)
945 	dellist (&rnode->other);
946     if (rnode->access != NULL)
947 	free (rnode->access);
948     if (rnode->locks_data != NULL)
949 	free (rnode->locks_data);
950     if (rnode->locks != NULL)
951 	dellist (&rnode->locks);
952     if (rnode->comment != NULL)
953 	free (rnode->comment);
954     if (rnode->desc != NULL)
955 	free (rnode->desc);
956 }
957 
958 
959 
960 /* free_rcsvers_contents -- free up the contents of an RCSVers node,
961    but also free the pointer to the node itself. */
962 /* Note: The `hardlinks' list is *not* freed, since it is merely a
963    pointer into the `hardlist' structure (defined in hardlink.c), and
964    that structure is freed elsewhere in the program. */
965 static void
966 free_rcsvers_contents (RCSVers *rnode)
967 {
968     if (rnode->branches != NULL)
969 	dellist (&rnode->branches);
970     if (rnode->date != NULL)
971 	free (rnode->date);
972     if (rnode->next != NULL)
973 	free (rnode->next);
974     if (rnode->author != NULL)
975 	free (rnode->author);
976     if (rnode->state != NULL)
977 	free (rnode->state);
978     if (rnode->other != NULL)
979 	dellist (&rnode->other);
980     if (rnode->other_delta != NULL)
981 	dellist (&rnode->other_delta);
982     if (rnode->text != NULL)
983 	freedeltatext (rnode->text);
984     free (rnode);
985 }
986 
987 
988 
989 /*
990  * rcsvers_delproc - free up an RCSVers type node
991  */
992 static void
993 rcsvers_delproc (Node *p)
994 {
995     free_rcsvers_contents (p->data);
996 }
997 
998 
999 
1000 /* These functions retrieve keys and values from an RCS file using a
1001    buffer.  We use this somewhat complex approach because it turns out
1002    that for many common operations, CVS spends most of its time
1003    reading keys, so it's worth doing some fairly hairy optimization.  */
1004 
1005 /* The number of bytes we try to read each time we need more data.  */
1006 
1007 #define RCSBUF_BUFSIZE (8192)
1008 
1009 /* The buffer we use to store data.  This grows as needed.  */
1010 
1011 static char *rcsbuf_buffer = NULL;
1012 static size_t rcsbuf_buffer_size = 0;
1013 
1014 /* Whether rcsbuf_buffer is in use.  This is used as a sanity check.  */
1015 
1016 static int rcsbuf_inuse;
1017 
1018 /* Set up to start gathering keys and values from an RCS file.  This
1019    initializes RCSBUF.  */
1020 
1021 static void
1022 rcsbuf_open (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, FILE *fp, const char *filename,
1023 	     long unsigned int pos)
1024 {
1025     if (rcsbuf_inuse)
1026 	error (1, 0, "rcsbuf_open: internal error");
1027     rcsbuf_inuse = 1;
1028 
1029 #ifdef HAVE_MMAP
1030     {
1031 	/* When we have mmap, it is much more efficient to let the system do the
1032 	 * buffering and caching for us
1033 	 */
1034 	struct stat fs;
1035 	size_t mmap_off = 0;
1036 
1037 	if ( fstat (fileno(fp), &fs) < 0 )
1038 	    error ( 1, errno, "Could not stat RCS archive %s for mapping", filename );
1039 
1040 	if (pos)
1041 	{
1042 	    size_t ps = getpagesize ();
1043 	    mmap_off = ( pos / ps ) * ps;
1044 	}
1045 
1046 	/* Map private here since this particular buffer is read only */
1047 	rcsbuf_buffer = mmap ( NULL, fs.st_size - mmap_off,
1048 				PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE,
1049 				MAP_PRIVATE, fileno(fp), mmap_off );
1050 	if ( rcsbuf_buffer == NULL || rcsbuf_buffer == MAP_FAILED )
1051 	    error ( 1, errno, "Could not map memory to RCS archive %s", filename );
1052 
1053 	rcsbuf_buffer_size = fs.st_size - mmap_off;
1054 	rcsbuf->ptr = rcsbuf_buffer + pos - mmap_off;
1055 	rcsbuf->ptrend = rcsbuf_buffer + fs.st_size - mmap_off;
1056 	rcsbuf->pos = mmap_off;
1057     }
1058 #else /* !HAVE_MMAP */
1059     if (rcsbuf_buffer_size < RCSBUF_BUFSIZE)
1060 	expand_string (&rcsbuf_buffer, &rcsbuf_buffer_size, RCSBUF_BUFSIZE);
1061 
1062     rcsbuf->ptr = rcsbuf_buffer;
1063     rcsbuf->ptrend = rcsbuf_buffer;
1064     rcsbuf->pos = pos;
1065 #endif /* HAVE_MMAP */
1066     rcsbuf->fp = fp;
1067     rcsbuf->filename = filename;
1068     rcsbuf->vlen = 0;
1069     rcsbuf->at_string = 0;
1070     rcsbuf->embedded_at = 0;
1071 }
1072 
1073 
1074 
1075 /* Stop gathering keys from an RCS file.  */
1076 static void
1077 rcsbuf_close (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf)
1078 {
1079     if (! rcsbuf_inuse)
1080 	error (1, 0, "rcsbuf_close: internal error");
1081 #ifdef HAVE_MMAP
1082     munmap ( rcsbuf_buffer, rcsbuf_buffer_size );
1083 #endif
1084     rcsbuf_inuse = 0;
1085 }
1086 
1087 
1088 
1089 /* Read a key/value pair from an RCS file.  This sets *KEYP to point
1090    to the key, and *VALUEP to point to the value.  A missing or empty
1091    value is indicated by setting *VALUEP to NULL.
1092 
1093    This function returns 1 on success, or 0 on EOF.  If there is an
1094    error reading the file, or an EOF in an unexpected location, it
1095    gives a fatal error.
1096 
1097    This sets *KEYP and *VALUEP to point to storage managed by
1098    rcsbuf_getkey.  Moreover, *VALUEP has not been massaged from the
1099    RCS format: it may contain embedded whitespace and embedded '@'
1100    characters.  Call rcsbuf_valcopy or rcsbuf_valpolish to do
1101    appropriate massaging.  */
1102 
1103 /* Note that the extreme hair in rcsbuf_getkey is because profiling
1104    statistics show that it was worth it. */
1105 static int
1106 rcsbuf_getkey (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, char **keyp, char **valp)
1107 {
1108     register const char * const my_spacetab = spacetab;
1109     register char *ptr, *ptrend;
1110     char c;
1111 
1112 #define my_whitespace(c)	(my_spacetab[(unsigned char)c] != 0)
1113 
1114     rcsbuf->vlen = 0;
1115     rcsbuf->at_string = 0;
1116     rcsbuf->embedded_at = 0;
1117 
1118     ptr = rcsbuf->ptr;
1119     ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1120 
1121     /* Sanity check.  */
1122     assert (ptr >= rcsbuf_buffer && ptr <= rcsbuf_buffer + rcsbuf_buffer_size);
1123     assert (ptrend >= rcsbuf_buffer && ptrend <= rcsbuf_buffer + rcsbuf_buffer_size);
1124 
1125 #ifndef HAVE_MMAP
1126     /* If the pointer is more than RCSBUF_BUFSIZE bytes into the
1127        buffer, move back to the start of the buffer.  This keeps the
1128        buffer from growing indefinitely.  */
1129     if (ptr - rcsbuf_buffer >= RCSBUF_BUFSIZE)
1130     {
1131 	int len;
1132 
1133 	len = ptrend - ptr;
1134 
1135 	/* Sanity check: we don't read more than RCSBUF_BUFSIZE bytes
1136            at a time, so we can't have more bytes than that past PTR.  */
1137 	assert (len <= RCSBUF_BUFSIZE);
1138 
1139 	/* Update the POS field, which holds the file offset of the
1140            first byte in the RCSBUF_BUFFER buffer.  */
1141 	rcsbuf->pos += ptr - rcsbuf_buffer;
1142 
1143 	memcpy (rcsbuf_buffer, ptr, len);
1144 	ptr = rcsbuf_buffer;
1145 	ptrend = ptr + len;
1146 	rcsbuf->ptrend = ptrend;
1147     }
1148 #endif /* HAVE_MMAP */
1149 
1150     /* Skip leading whitespace.  */
1151 
1152     while (1)
1153     {
1154 	if (ptr >= ptrend)
1155 	{
1156 	    ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptr, NULL, NULL);
1157 	    if (ptr == NULL)
1158 		return 0;
1159 	    ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1160 	}
1161 
1162 	c = *ptr;
1163 	if (! my_whitespace (c))
1164 	    break;
1165 
1166 	++ptr;
1167     }
1168 
1169     /* We've found the start of the key.  */
1170 
1171     *keyp = ptr;
1172 
1173     if (c != ';')
1174     {
1175 	while (1)
1176 	{
1177 	    ++ptr;
1178 	    if (ptr >= ptrend)
1179 	    {
1180 		ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptr, keyp, NULL);
1181 		if (ptr == NULL)
1182 		    error (1, 0, "EOF in key in RCS file %s",
1183 			   primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1184 		ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1185 	    }
1186 	    c = *ptr;
1187 	    if (c == ';' || my_whitespace (c))
1188 		break;
1189 	}
1190     }
1191 
1192     /* Here *KEYP points to the key in the buffer, C is the character
1193        we found at the of the key, and PTR points to the location in
1194        the buffer where we found C.  We must set *PTR to \0 in order
1195        to terminate the key.  If the key ended with ';', then there is
1196        no value.  */
1197 
1198     *ptr = '\0';
1199     ++ptr;
1200 
1201     if (c == ';')
1202     {
1203 	*valp = NULL;
1204 	rcsbuf->ptr = ptr;
1205 	return 1;
1206     }
1207 
1208     /* C must be whitespace.  Skip whitespace between the key and the
1209        value.  If we find ';' now, there is no value.  */
1210 
1211     while (1)
1212     {
1213 	if (ptr >= ptrend)
1214 	{
1215 	    ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptr, keyp, NULL);
1216 	    if (ptr == NULL)
1217 		error (1, 0, "EOF while looking for value in RCS file %s",
1218 		       primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1219 	    ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1220 	}
1221 	c = *ptr;
1222 	if (c == ';')
1223 	{
1224 	    *valp = NULL;
1225 	    rcsbuf->ptr = ptr + 1;
1226 	    return 1;
1227 	}
1228 	if (! my_whitespace (c))
1229 	    break;
1230 	++ptr;
1231     }
1232 
1233     /* Now PTR points to the start of the value, and C is the first
1234        character of the value.  */
1235 
1236     if (c != '@')
1237 	*valp = ptr;
1238     else
1239     {
1240 	char *pat;
1241 	size_t vlen;
1242 
1243 	/* Optimize the common case of a value composed of a single
1244 	   '@' string.  */
1245 
1246 	rcsbuf->at_string = 1;
1247 
1248 	++ptr;
1249 
1250 	*valp = ptr;
1251 
1252 	while (1)
1253 	{
1254 	    while ((pat = memchr (ptr, '@', ptrend - ptr)) == NULL)
1255 	    {
1256 		/* Note that we pass PTREND as the PTR value to
1257                    rcsbuf_fill, so that we will wind up setting PTR to
1258                    the location corresponding to the old PTREND, so
1259                    that we don't search the same bytes again.  */
1260 		ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptrend, keyp, valp);
1261 		if (ptr == NULL)
1262 		    error (1, 0,
1263 			   "EOF while looking for end of string in RCS file %s",
1264 			   primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1265 		ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1266 	    }
1267 
1268 	    /* Handle the special case of an '@' right at the end of
1269                the known bytes.  */
1270 	    if (pat + 1 >= ptrend)
1271 	    {
1272 		/* Note that we pass PAT, not PTR, here.  */
1273 		pat = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, pat, keyp, valp);
1274 		if (pat == NULL)
1275 		{
1276 		    /* EOF here is OK; it just means that the last
1277 		       character of the file was an '@' terminating a
1278 		       value for a key type which does not require a
1279 		       trailing ';'.  */
1280 		    pat = rcsbuf->ptrend - 1;
1281 
1282 		}
1283 		ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1284 
1285 		/* Note that the value of PTR is bogus here.  This is
1286 		   OK, because we don't use it.  */
1287 	    }
1288 
1289 	    if (pat + 1 >= ptrend || pat[1] != '@')
1290 		break;
1291 
1292 	    /* We found an '@' pair in the string.  Keep looking.  */
1293 	    ++rcsbuf->embedded_at;
1294 	    ptr = pat + 2;
1295 	}
1296 
1297 	/* Here PAT points to the final '@' in the string.  */
1298 
1299 	*pat = '\0';
1300 
1301 	vlen = pat - *valp;
1302 	if (vlen == 0)
1303 	    *valp = NULL;
1304 	rcsbuf->vlen = vlen;
1305 
1306 	ptr = pat + 1;
1307     }
1308 
1309     /* Certain keywords only have a '@' string.  If there is no '@'
1310        string, then the old getrcskey function assumed that they had
1311        no value, and we do the same.  */
1312 
1313     {
1314 	char *k;
1315 
1316 	k = *keyp;
1317 	if (STREQ (k, RCSDESC)
1318 	    || STREQ (k, "text")
1319 	    || STREQ (k, "log"))
1320 	{
1321 	    if (c != '@')
1322 		*valp = NULL;
1323 	    rcsbuf->ptr = ptr;
1324 	    return 1;
1325 	}
1326     }
1327 
1328     /* If we've already gathered a '@' string, try to skip whitespace
1329        and find a ';'.  */
1330     if (c == '@')
1331     {
1332 	while (1)
1333 	{
1334 	    char n;
1335 
1336 	    if (ptr >= ptrend)
1337 	    {
1338 		ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptr, keyp, valp);
1339 		if (ptr == NULL)
1340 		    error (1, 0, "EOF in value in RCS file %s",
1341 			   primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1342 		ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1343 	    }
1344 	    n = *ptr;
1345 	    if (n == ';')
1346 	    {
1347 		/* We're done.  We already set everything up for this
1348                    case above.  */
1349 		rcsbuf->ptr = ptr + 1;
1350 		return 1;
1351 	    }
1352 	    if (! my_whitespace (n))
1353 		break;
1354 	    ++ptr;
1355 	}
1356 
1357 	/* The value extends past the '@' string.  We need to undo the
1358            '@' stripping done in the default case above.  This
1359            case never happens in a plain RCS file, but it can happen
1360            if user defined phrases are used.  */
1361 	((*valp)--)[rcsbuf->vlen++] = '@';
1362     }
1363 
1364     /* Here we have a value which is not a simple '@' string.  We need
1365        to gather up everything until the next ';', including any '@'
1366        strings.  *VALP points to the start of the value.  If
1367        RCSBUF->VLEN is not zero, then we have already read an '@'
1368        string, and PTR points to the data following the '@' string.
1369        Otherwise, PTR points to the start of the value.  */
1370 
1371     while (1)
1372     {
1373 	char *start, *psemi, *pat;
1374 
1375 	/* Find the ';' which must end the value.  */
1376 	start = ptr;
1377 	while ((psemi = memchr (ptr, ';', ptrend - ptr)) == NULL)
1378 	{
1379 	    int slen;
1380 
1381 	    /* Note that we pass PTREND as the PTR value to
1382 	       rcsbuf_fill, so that we will wind up setting PTR to the
1383 	       location corresponding to the old PTREND, so that we
1384 	       don't search the same bytes again.  */
1385 	    slen = start - *valp;
1386 	    ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptrend, keyp, valp);
1387 	    if (ptr == NULL)
1388 		error (1, 0, "EOF in value in RCS file %s",
1389 		       primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1390 	    start = *valp + slen;
1391 	    ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1392 	}
1393 
1394 	/* See if there are any '@' strings in the value.  */
1395 	pat = memchr (start, '@', psemi - start);
1396 
1397 	if (pat == NULL)
1398 	{
1399 	    size_t vlen;
1400 
1401 	    /* We're done with the value.  Trim any trailing
1402                whitespace.  */
1403 
1404 	    rcsbuf->ptr = psemi + 1;
1405 
1406 	    start = *valp;
1407 	    while (psemi > start && my_whitespace (psemi[-1]))
1408 		--psemi;
1409 	    *psemi = '\0';
1410 
1411 	    vlen = psemi - start;
1412 	    if (vlen == 0)
1413 		*valp = NULL;
1414 	    rcsbuf->vlen = vlen;
1415 
1416 	    return 1;
1417 	}
1418 
1419 	/* We found an '@' string in the value.  We set RCSBUF->AT_STRING
1420 	   and RCSBUF->EMBEDDED_AT to indicate that we won't be able to
1421 	   compress whitespace correctly for this type of value.
1422 	   Since this type of value never arises in a normal RCS file,
1423 	   this should not be a big deal.  It means that if anybody
1424 	   adds a phrase which can have both an '@' string and regular
1425 	   text, they will have to handle whitespace compression
1426 	   themselves.  */
1427 
1428 	rcsbuf->at_string = 1;
1429 	rcsbuf->embedded_at = -1;
1430 
1431 	ptr = pat + 1;
1432 
1433 	while (1)
1434 	{
1435 	    while ((pat = memchr (ptr, '@', ptrend - ptr)) == NULL)
1436 	    {
1437 		/* Note that we pass PTREND as the PTR value to
1438                    rcsbuff_fill, so that we will wind up setting PTR
1439                    to the location corresponding to the old PTREND, so
1440                    that we don't search the same bytes again.  */
1441 		ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptrend, keyp, valp);
1442 		if (ptr == NULL)
1443 		    error (1, 0,
1444 			   "EOF while looking for end of string in RCS file %s",
1445 			   primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1446 		ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1447 	    }
1448 
1449 	    /* Handle the special case of an '@' right at the end of
1450                the known bytes.  */
1451 	    if (pat + 1 >= ptrend)
1452 	    {
1453 		ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptr, keyp, valp);
1454 		if (ptr == NULL)
1455 		    error (1, 0, "EOF in value in RCS file %s",
1456 			   primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1457 		ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1458 	    }
1459 
1460 	    if (pat[1] != '@')
1461 		break;
1462 
1463 	    /* We found an '@' pair in the string.  Keep looking.  */
1464 	    ptr = pat + 2;
1465 	}
1466 
1467 	/* Here PAT points to the final '@' in the string.  */
1468 	ptr = pat + 1;
1469     }
1470 
1471 #undef my_whitespace
1472 }
1473 
1474 
1475 
1476 /* Read an RCS revision number from an RCS file.  This sets *REVP to
1477    point to the revision number; it will point to space that is
1478    managed by the rcsbuf functions, and is only good until the next
1479    call to rcsbuf_getkey or rcsbuf_getrevnum.
1480 
1481    This function returns 1 on success, or 0 on EOF.  If there is an
1482    error reading the file, or an EOF in an unexpected location, it
1483    gives a fatal error.  */
1484 static int
1485 rcsbuf_getrevnum (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, char **revp)
1486 {
1487     char *ptr, *ptrend;
1488     char c;
1489 
1490     ptr = rcsbuf->ptr;
1491     ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1492 
1493     *revp = NULL;
1494 
1495     /* Skip leading whitespace.  */
1496 
1497     while (1)
1498     {
1499 	if (ptr >= ptrend)
1500 	{
1501 	    ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptr, NULL, NULL);
1502 	    if (ptr == NULL)
1503 		return 0;
1504 	    ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1505 	}
1506 
1507 	c = *ptr;
1508 	if (! whitespace (c))
1509 	    break;
1510 
1511 	++ptr;
1512     }
1513 
1514     if (! isdigit ((unsigned char) c) && c != '.')
1515 	error (1, 0,
1516 	       "\
1517 unexpected '\\x%x' reading revision number in RCS file %s",
1518 	       c, primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1519 
1520     *revp = ptr;
1521 
1522     do
1523     {
1524 	++ptr;
1525 	if (ptr >= ptrend)
1526 	{
1527 	    ptr = rcsbuf_fill (rcsbuf, ptr, revp, NULL);
1528 	    if (ptr == NULL)
1529 		error (1, 0,
1530 		       "unexpected EOF reading revision number in RCS file %s",
1531 		       primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1532 	    ptrend = rcsbuf->ptrend;
1533 	}
1534 
1535 	c = *ptr;
1536     }
1537     while (isdigit ((unsigned char) c) || c == '.');
1538 
1539     if (! whitespace (c))
1540 	error (1, 0, "\
1541 unexpected '\\x%x' reading revision number in RCS file %s",
1542 	       c, primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1543 
1544     *ptr = '\0';
1545 
1546     rcsbuf->ptr = ptr + 1;
1547 
1548     return 1;
1549 }
1550 
1551 
1552 
1553 /* Fill RCSBUF_BUFFER with bytes from the file associated with RCSBUF,
1554    updating PTR and the PTREND field.  If KEYP and *KEYP are not NULL,
1555    then *KEYP points into the buffer, and must be adjusted if the
1556    buffer is changed.  Likewise for VALP.  Returns the new value of
1557    PTR, or NULL on error.  */
1558 static char *
1559 rcsbuf_fill (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, char *ptr, char **keyp, char **valp)
1560 {
1561 #ifdef HAVE_MMAP
1562     return NULL;
1563 #else /* HAVE_MMAP */
1564     int got;
1565 
1566     if (rcsbuf->ptrend - rcsbuf_buffer + RCSBUF_BUFSIZE > rcsbuf_buffer_size)
1567     {
1568 	int poff, peoff, koff, voff;
1569 
1570 	poff = ptr - rcsbuf_buffer;
1571 	peoff = rcsbuf->ptrend - rcsbuf_buffer;
1572 	koff = keyp == NULL ? 0 : *keyp - rcsbuf_buffer;
1573 	voff = valp == NULL ? 0 : *valp - rcsbuf_buffer;
1574 
1575 	expand_string (&rcsbuf_buffer, &rcsbuf_buffer_size,
1576 		       rcsbuf_buffer_size + RCSBUF_BUFSIZE);
1577 
1578 	ptr = rcsbuf_buffer + poff;
1579 	rcsbuf->ptrend = rcsbuf_buffer + peoff;
1580 	if (keyp != NULL)
1581 	    *keyp = rcsbuf_buffer + koff;
1582 	if (valp != NULL)
1583 	    *valp = rcsbuf_buffer + voff;
1584     }
1585 
1586     got = fread (rcsbuf->ptrend, 1, RCSBUF_BUFSIZE, rcsbuf->fp);
1587     if (got == 0)
1588     {
1589 	if (ferror (rcsbuf->fp))
1590 	    error (1, errno, "cannot read %s", rcsbuf->filename);
1591 	return NULL;
1592     }
1593 
1594     rcsbuf->ptrend += got;
1595 
1596     return ptr;
1597 #endif /* HAVE_MMAP */
1598 }
1599 
1600 
1601 
1602 /* Test whether the last value returned by rcsbuf_getkey is a composite
1603    value or not. */
1604 static int
1605 rcsbuf_valcmp (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf)
1606 {
1607     return rcsbuf->at_string && rcsbuf->embedded_at < 0;
1608 }
1609 
1610 
1611 
1612 /* Copy the value VAL returned by rcsbuf_getkey into a memory buffer,
1613    returning the memory buffer.  Polish the value like
1614    rcsbuf_valpolish, q.v.  */
1615 static char *
1616 rcsbuf_valcopy (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, char *val, int polish, size_t *lenp)
1617 {
1618     size_t vlen;
1619     int embedded_at;
1620     char *ret;
1621 
1622     if (val == NULL)
1623     {
1624 	if (lenp != NULL)
1625 	    *lenp = 0;
1626 	return NULL;
1627     }
1628 
1629     vlen = rcsbuf->vlen;
1630     embedded_at = rcsbuf->embedded_at < 0 ? 0 : rcsbuf->embedded_at;
1631 
1632     ret = xmalloc (vlen - embedded_at + 1);
1633 
1634     if (rcsbuf->at_string ? embedded_at == 0 : ! polish)
1635     {
1636 	/* No special action to take.  */
1637 	memcpy (ret, val, vlen + 1);
1638 	if (lenp != NULL)
1639 	    *lenp = vlen;
1640 	return ret;
1641     }
1642 
1643     rcsbuf_valpolish_internal (rcsbuf, ret, val, lenp);
1644     return ret;
1645 }
1646 
1647 
1648 
1649 /* Polish the value VAL returned by rcsbuf_getkey.  The POLISH
1650    parameter is non-zero if multiple embedded whitespace characters
1651    should be compressed into a single whitespace character.  Note that
1652    leading and trailing whitespace was already removed by
1653    rcsbuf_getkey.  Within an '@' string, pairs of '@' characters are
1654    compressed into a single '@' character regardless of the value of
1655    POLISH.  If LENP is not NULL, set *LENP to the length of the value.  */
1656 static void
1657 rcsbuf_valpolish (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, char *val, int polish,
1658 		  size_t *lenp)
1659 {
1660     if (val == NULL)
1661     {
1662 	if (lenp != NULL)
1663 	    *lenp= 0;
1664 	return;
1665     }
1666 
1667     if (rcsbuf->at_string ? rcsbuf->embedded_at == 0 : ! polish)
1668     {
1669 	/* No special action to take.  */
1670 	if (lenp != NULL)
1671 	    *lenp = rcsbuf->vlen;
1672 	return;
1673     }
1674 
1675     rcsbuf_valpolish_internal (rcsbuf, val, val, lenp);
1676 }
1677 
1678 
1679 
1680 /* Internal polishing routine, called from rcsbuf_valcopy and
1681    rcsbuf_valpolish.  */
1682 static void
1683 rcsbuf_valpolish_internal (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, char *to,
1684 			   const char *from, size_t *lenp)
1685 {
1686     size_t len;
1687 
1688     len = rcsbuf->vlen;
1689 
1690     if (! rcsbuf->at_string)
1691     {
1692 	char *orig_to;
1693 	size_t clen;
1694 
1695 	orig_to = to;
1696 
1697 	for (clen = len; clen > 0; ++from, --clen)
1698 	{
1699 	    char c;
1700 
1701 	    c = *from;
1702 	    if (whitespace (c))
1703 	    {
1704 		/* Note that we know that clen can not drop to zero
1705                    while we have whitespace, because we know there is
1706                    no trailing whitespace.  */
1707 		while (whitespace (from[1]))
1708 		{
1709 		    ++from;
1710 		    --clen;
1711 		}
1712 		c = ' ';
1713 	    }
1714 	    *to++ = c;
1715 	}
1716 
1717 	*to = '\0';
1718 
1719 	if (lenp != NULL)
1720 	    *lenp = to - orig_to;
1721     }
1722     else
1723     {
1724 	const char *orig_from;
1725 	char *orig_to;
1726 	int embedded_at;
1727 	size_t clen;
1728 
1729 	orig_from = from;
1730 	orig_to = to;
1731 
1732 	embedded_at = rcsbuf->embedded_at;
1733 	assert (embedded_at > 0);
1734 
1735 	if (lenp != NULL)
1736 	    *lenp = len - embedded_at;
1737 
1738 	for (clen = len; clen > 0; ++from, --clen)
1739 	{
1740 	    char c;
1741 
1742 	    c = *from;
1743 	    *to++ = c;
1744 	    if (c == '@')
1745 	    {
1746 		++from;
1747 
1748 		/* Sanity check.
1749 		 *
1750 		 * FIXME: I restored this to an abort from an assert based on
1751 		 * advice from Larry Jones that asserts should not be used to
1752 		 * confirm the validity of an RCS file...  This leaves two
1753 		 * issues here: 1) I am uncertain that the fact that we will
1754 		 * only find double '@'s hasn't already been confirmed; and:
1755 		 * 2) If this is the proper place to spot the error in the RCS
1756 		 * file, then we should print a much clearer error here for the
1757 		 * user!!!!!!!
1758 		 *
1759 		 *	- DRP
1760 		 */
1761 		if (*from != '@' || clen == 0)
1762 		    abort ();
1763 
1764 		--clen;
1765 
1766 		--embedded_at;
1767 		if (embedded_at == 0)
1768 		{
1769 		    /* We've found all the embedded '@' characters.
1770                        We can just memcpy the rest of the buffer after
1771                        this '@' character.  */
1772 		    if (orig_to != orig_from)
1773 			memcpy (to, from + 1, clen - 1);
1774 		    else
1775 			memmove (to, from + 1, clen - 1);
1776 		    from += clen;
1777 		    to += clen - 1;
1778 		    break;
1779 		}
1780 	    }
1781 	}
1782 
1783 	/* Sanity check.  */
1784 	assert (from == orig_from + len
1785 	    && to == orig_to + (len - rcsbuf->embedded_at));
1786 
1787 	*to = '\0';
1788     }
1789 }
1790 
1791 
1792 
1793 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
1794 
1795 /* Copy the next word from the value VALP returned by rcsbuf_getkey into a
1796    memory buffer, updating VALP and returning the memory buffer.  Return
1797    NULL when there are no more words. */
1798 
1799 static char *
1800 rcsbuf_valword (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, char **valp)
1801 {
1802     register const char * const my_spacetab = spacetab;
1803     register char *ptr, *pat;
1804     char c;
1805 
1806 # define my_whitespace(c)	(my_spacetab[(unsigned char)c] != 0)
1807 
1808     if (*valp == NULL)
1809 	return NULL;
1810 
1811     for (ptr = *valp; my_whitespace (*ptr); ++ptr) ;
1812     if (*ptr == '\0')
1813     {
1814 	assert (ptr - *valp == rcsbuf->vlen);
1815 	*valp = NULL;
1816 	rcsbuf->vlen = 0;
1817 	return NULL;
1818     }
1819 
1820     /* PTR now points to the start of a value.  Find out whether it is
1821        a num, an id, a string or a colon. */
1822     c = *ptr;
1823     if (c == ':')
1824     {
1825 	rcsbuf->vlen -= ++ptr - *valp;
1826 	*valp = ptr;
1827 	return xstrdup (":");
1828     }
1829 
1830     if (c == '@')
1831     {
1832 	int embedded_at = 0;
1833 	size_t vlen;
1834 
1835 	pat = ++ptr;
1836 	while ((pat = strchr (pat, '@')) != NULL)
1837 	{
1838 	    if (pat[1] != '@')
1839 		break;
1840 	    ++embedded_at;
1841 	    pat += 2;
1842 	}
1843 
1844 	/* Here PAT points to the final '@' in the string.  */
1845 	*pat++ = '\0';
1846 	assert (rcsbuf->at_string);
1847 	vlen = rcsbuf->vlen - (pat - *valp);
1848 	rcsbuf->vlen = pat - ptr - 1;
1849 	rcsbuf->embedded_at = embedded_at;
1850 	ptr = rcsbuf_valcopy (rcsbuf, ptr, 0, NULL);
1851 	*valp = pat;
1852 	rcsbuf->vlen = vlen;
1853 	if (strchr (pat, '@') == NULL)
1854 	    rcsbuf->at_string = 0;
1855 	else
1856 	    rcsbuf->embedded_at = -1;
1857 	return ptr;
1858     }
1859 
1860     /* *PTR is neither `:', `;' nor `@', so it should be the start of a num
1861        or an id.  Make sure it is not another special character. */
1862     if (c == '$' || c == '.' || c == ',')
1863 	error (1, 0, "invalid special character in RCS field in %s",
1864 	       primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1865 
1866     pat = ptr;
1867     while (1)
1868     {
1869 	/* Legitimate ID characters are digits, dots and any `graphic
1870            printing character that is not a special.' This test ought
1871 	   to do the trick. */
1872 	c = *++pat;
1873 	if (!isprint ((unsigned char) c) ||
1874 	    c == ';' || c == '$' || c == ',' || c == '@' || c == ':')
1875 	    break;
1876     }
1877 
1878     /* PAT points to the last non-id character in this word, and C is
1879        the character in its memory cell.  Check to make sure that it
1880        is a legitimate word delimiter -- whitespace or end. */
1881     if (c != '\0' && !my_whitespace (c))
1882 	error (1, 0, "invalid special character in RCS field in %s",
1883 	       primary_root_inverse_translate (rcsbuf->filename));
1884 
1885     *pat = '\0';
1886     rcsbuf->vlen -= pat - *valp;
1887     *valp = pat;
1888     return xstrdup (ptr);
1889 
1890 # undef my_whitespace
1891 }
1892 
1893 #endif /* PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT */
1894 
1895 
1896 
1897 /* Return the current position of an rcsbuf.  */
1898 static off_t
1899 rcsbuf_ftello (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf)
1900 {
1901     return rcsbuf->pos + rcsbuf->ptr - rcsbuf_buffer;
1902 }
1903 
1904 
1905 
1906 /* Return a pointer to any data buffered for RCSBUF, along with the
1907    length.  */
1908 static void
1909 rcsbuf_get_buffered (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, char **datap, size_t *lenp)
1910 {
1911     *datap = rcsbuf->ptr;
1912     *lenp = rcsbuf->ptrend - rcsbuf->ptr;
1913 }
1914 
1915 
1916 
1917 /* CVS optimizes by quickly reading some header information from a
1918    file.  If it decides it needs to do more with the file, it reopens
1919    it.  We speed that up here by maintaining a cache of a single open
1920    file, to save the time it takes to reopen the file in the common
1921    case.  */
1922 static RCSNode *cached_rcs;
1923 static struct rcsbuffer cached_rcsbuf;
1924 
1925 /* Cache RCS and RCSBUF.  This takes responsibility for closing
1926    RCSBUF->FP.  */
1927 static void
1928 rcsbuf_cache (RCSNode *rcs, struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf)
1929 {
1930     if (cached_rcs != NULL)
1931 	rcsbuf_cache_close ();
1932     cached_rcs = rcs;
1933     ++rcs->refcount;
1934     cached_rcsbuf = *rcsbuf;
1935 }
1936 
1937 
1938 
1939 /* If there is anything in the cache, close it.  */
1940 static void
1941 rcsbuf_cache_close (void)
1942 {
1943     if (cached_rcs != NULL)
1944     {
1945 	rcsbuf_close (&cached_rcsbuf);
1946 	if (fclose (cached_rcsbuf.fp) != 0)
1947 	    error (0, errno, "cannot close %s", cached_rcsbuf.filename);
1948 	freercsnode (&cached_rcs);
1949 	cached_rcs = NULL;
1950     }
1951 }
1952 
1953 
1954 
1955 /* Open an rcsbuffer for RCS, getting it from the cache if possible.
1956    Set *FPP to the file, and *RCSBUFP to the rcsbuf.  The file should
1957    be put at position POS.  */
1958 static void
1959 rcsbuf_cache_open (RCSNode *rcs, off_t pos, FILE **pfp,
1960 		   struct rcsbuffer *prcsbuf)
1961 {
1962 #ifndef HAVE_MMAP
1963     if (cached_rcs == rcs)
1964     {
1965 	if (rcsbuf_ftello (&cached_rcsbuf) != pos)
1966 	{
1967 	    if (fseeko (cached_rcsbuf.fp, pos, SEEK_SET) != 0)
1968 		error (1, 0, "cannot fseeko RCS file %s",
1969 		       cached_rcsbuf.filename);
1970 	    cached_rcsbuf.ptr = rcsbuf_buffer;
1971 	    cached_rcsbuf.ptrend = rcsbuf_buffer;
1972 	    cached_rcsbuf.pos = pos;
1973 	}
1974 	*pfp = cached_rcsbuf.fp;
1975 
1976 	/* When RCS_parse opens a file using fopen_case, it frees the
1977            filename which we cached in CACHED_RCSBUF and stores a new
1978            file name in RCS->PATH.  We avoid problems here by always
1979            copying the filename over.  FIXME: This is hackish.  */
1980 	cached_rcsbuf.filename = rcs->path;
1981 
1982 	*prcsbuf = cached_rcsbuf;
1983 
1984 	cached_rcs = NULL;
1985 
1986 	/* Removing RCS from the cache removes a reference to it.  */
1987 	--rcs->refcount;
1988 	if (rcs->refcount <= 0)
1989 	    error (1, 0, "rcsbuf_cache_open: internal error");
1990     }
1991     else
1992     {
1993 #endif /* ifndef HAVE_MMAP */
1994 	/* FIXME:  If these routines can be rewritten to not write to the
1995 	 * rcs file buffer, there would be a considerably larger memory savings
1996 	 * from using mmap since the shared file would never need be copied to
1997 	 * process memory.
1998 	 *
1999 	 * If this happens, cached mmapped buffers would be usable, but don't
2000 	 * forget to make sure rcs->pos < pos here...
2001 	 */
2002 	if (cached_rcs != NULL)
2003 	    rcsbuf_cache_close ();
2004 
2005 	*pfp = CVS_FOPEN (rcs->path, FOPEN_BINARY_READ);
2006 	if (*pfp == NULL)
2007 	    error (1, 0, "unable to reopen `%s'", rcs->path);
2008 #ifndef HAVE_MMAP
2009 	if (pos != 0)
2010 	{
2011 	    if (fseeko (*pfp, pos, SEEK_SET) != 0)
2012 		error (1, 0, "cannot fseeko RCS file %s", rcs->path);
2013 	}
2014 #endif /* ifndef HAVE_MMAP */
2015 	rcsbuf_open (prcsbuf, *pfp, rcs->path, pos);
2016 #ifndef HAVE_MMAP
2017     }
2018 #endif /* ifndef HAVE_MMAP */
2019 }
2020 
2021 
2022 
2023 /*
2024  * process the symbols list of the rcs file
2025  */
2026 static void
2027 do_symbols (List *list, char *val)
2028 {
2029     Node *p;
2030     char *cp = val;
2031     char *tag, *rev;
2032 
2033     assert (cp);
2034 
2035     for (;;)
2036     {
2037 	/* skip leading whitespace */
2038 	while (whitespace (*cp))
2039 	    cp++;
2040 
2041 	/* if we got to the end, we are done */
2042 	if (*cp == '\0')
2043 	    break;
2044 
2045 	/* split it up into tag and rev */
2046 	tag = cp;
2047 	cp = strchr (cp, ':');
2048 	*cp++ = '\0';
2049 	rev = cp;
2050 	while (!whitespace (*cp) && *cp != '\0')
2051 	    cp++;
2052 	if (*cp != '\0')
2053 	    *cp++ = '\0';
2054 
2055 	/* make a new node and add it to the list */
2056 	p = getnode ();
2057 	p->key = xstrdup (tag);
2058 	p->data = xstrdup (rev);
2059 	(void) addnode (list, p);
2060     }
2061 }
2062 
2063 
2064 
2065 /*
2066  * process the locks list of the rcs file
2067  * Like do_symbols, but hash entries are keyed backwards: i.e.
2068  * an entry like `user:rev' is keyed on REV rather than on USER.
2069  */
2070 static void
2071 do_locks (List *list, char *val)
2072 {
2073     Node *p;
2074     char *cp = val;
2075     char *user, *rev;
2076 
2077     assert (cp);
2078 
2079     for (;;)
2080     {
2081 	/* skip leading whitespace */
2082 	while (whitespace (*cp))
2083 	    cp++;
2084 
2085 	/* if we got to the end, we are done */
2086 	if (*cp == '\0')
2087 	    break;
2088 
2089 	/* split it up into user and rev */
2090 	user = cp;
2091 	cp = strchr (cp, ':');
2092 	*cp++ = '\0';
2093 	rev = cp;
2094 	while (!whitespace (*cp) && *cp != '\0')
2095 	    cp++;
2096 	if (*cp != '\0')
2097 	    *cp++ = '\0';
2098 
2099 	/* make a new node and add it to the list */
2100 	p = getnode ();
2101 	p->key = xstrdup (rev);
2102 	p->data = xstrdup (user);
2103 	(void) addnode (list, p);
2104     }
2105 }
2106 
2107 
2108 
2109 /*
2110  * process the branches list of a revision delta
2111  */
2112 static void
2113 do_branches (List *list, char *val)
2114 {
2115     Node *p;
2116     char *cp = val;
2117     char *branch;
2118 
2119     for (;;)
2120     {
2121 	/* skip leading whitespace */
2122 	while (whitespace (*cp))
2123 	    cp++;
2124 
2125 	/* if we got to the end, we are done */
2126 	if (*cp == '\0')
2127 	    break;
2128 
2129 	/* find the end of this branch */
2130 	branch = cp;
2131 	while (!whitespace (*cp) && *cp != '\0')
2132 	    cp++;
2133 	if (*cp != '\0')
2134 	    *cp++ = '\0';
2135 
2136 	/* make a new node and add it to the list */
2137 	p = getnode ();
2138 	p->key = xstrdup (branch);
2139 	(void) addnode (list, p);
2140     }
2141 }
2142 
2143 
2144 
2145 /*
2146  * Version Number
2147  *
2148  * Returns the requested version number of the RCS file, satisfying tags and/or
2149  * dates, and walking branches, if necessary.
2150  *
2151  * The result is returned; null-string if error.
2152  */
2153 char *
2154 RCS_getversion (RCSNode *rcs, const char *tag, const char *date,
2155                 int force_tag_match, int *simple_tag)
2156 {
2157     if (simple_tag != NULL)
2158 	*simple_tag = 0;
2159 
2160     /* make sure we have something to look at... */
2161     assert (rcs != NULL);
2162 
2163     if (tag && date)
2164     {
2165 	char *branch, *rev;
2166 
2167 	if (! RCS_nodeisbranch (rcs, tag))
2168 	{
2169 	    /* We can't get a particular date if the tag is not a
2170                branch.  */
2171 	    return NULL;
2172 	}
2173 
2174 	/* Work out the branch.  */
2175 	if (! isdigit ((unsigned char) tag[0]))
2176 	    branch = RCS_whatbranch (rcs, tag);
2177 	else
2178 	    branch = xstrdup (tag);
2179 
2180 	/* Fetch the revision of branch as of date.  */
2181 	rev = RCS_getdatebranch (rcs, date, branch);
2182 	free (branch);
2183 	return rev;
2184     }
2185     else if (tag)
2186 	return RCS_gettag (rcs, tag, force_tag_match, simple_tag);
2187     else if (date)
2188 	return RCS_getdate (rcs, date, force_tag_match);
2189     else
2190 	return RCS_head (rcs);
2191 
2192 }
2193 
2194 
2195 
2196 /*
2197  * Get existing revision number corresponding to tag or revision.
2198  * Similar to RCS_gettag but less interpretation imposed.
2199  * For example:
2200  * -- If tag designates a magic branch, RCS_tag2rev
2201  *    returns the magic branch number.
2202  * -- If tag is a branch tag, returns the branch number, not
2203  *    the revision of the head of the branch.
2204  * If tag or revision is not valid or does not exist in file,
2205  * return NULL.
2206  */
2207 char *
2208 RCS_tag2rev (RCSNode *rcs, char *tag)
2209 {
2210     char *rev, *pa, *pb;
2211     int i;
2212 
2213     assert (rcs != NULL);
2214 
2215     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
2216 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
2217 
2218     /* If a valid revision, try to look it up */
2219     if ( RCS_valid_rev (tag) )
2220     {
2221 	/* Make a copy so we can scribble on it */
2222 	rev =  xstrdup (tag);
2223 
2224 	/* If revision exists, return the copy */
2225 	if (RCS_exist_rev (rcs, tag))
2226 	    return rev;
2227 
2228 	/* Nope, none such. If tag is not a branch we're done. */
2229 	i = numdots (rev);
2230 	if ((i & 1) == 1 )
2231 	{
2232 	    pa = strrchr (rev, '.');
2233 	    if (i == 1 || *(pa-1) != RCS_MAGIC_BRANCH || *(pa-2) != '.')
2234 	    {
2235 		free (rev);
2236 		error (1, 0, "revision `%s' does not exist", tag);
2237 	    }
2238 	}
2239 
2240 	/* Try for a real (that is, exists in the RCS deltas) branch
2241 	   (RCS_exist_rev just checks for real revisions and revisions
2242 	   which have tags pointing to them).  */
2243 	pa = RCS_getbranch (rcs, rev, 1);
2244 	if (pa != NULL)
2245 	{
2246 	    free (pa);
2247 	    return rev;
2248 	}
2249 
2250        /* Tag is branch, but does not exist, try corresponding
2251 	* magic branch tag.
2252 	*
2253 	* FIXME: assumes all magic branches are of
2254 	* form "n.n.n ... .0.n".  I'll fix if somebody can
2255 	* send me a method to get a magic branch tag with
2256 	* the 0 in some other position -- <dan@gasboy.com>
2257 	*/
2258 	pa = strrchr (rev, '.');
2259 	if (!pa)
2260 	    /* This might happen, for instance, if an RCS file only contained
2261 	     * revisions 2.x and higher, and REV == "1".
2262 	     */
2263 	    error (1, 0, "revision `%s' does not exist", tag);
2264 
2265 	*pa++ = 0;
2266 	pb = Xasprintf ("%s.%d.%s", rev, RCS_MAGIC_BRANCH, pa);
2267 	free (rev);
2268 	rev = pb;
2269 	if (RCS_exist_rev (rcs, rev))
2270 	    return rev;
2271 	error (1, 0, "revision `%s' does not exist", tag);
2272     }
2273 
2274 
2275     RCS_check_tag (tag); /* exit if not a valid tag */
2276 
2277     /* If tag is "HEAD", special case to get head RCS revision */
2278     if (tag && STREQ (tag, TAG_HEAD))
2279         return RCS_head (rcs);
2280 
2281     /* If valid tag let translate_symtag say yea or nay. */
2282     rev = translate_symtag (rcs, tag);
2283 
2284     if (rev)
2285         return rev;
2286 
2287     /* Trust the caller to print warnings. */
2288     return NULL;
2289 }
2290 
2291 
2292 
2293 /*
2294  * Find the revision for a specific tag.
2295  * If force_tag_match is set, return NULL if an exact match is not
2296  * possible otherwise return RCS_head ().  We are careful to look for
2297  * and handle "magic" revisions specially.
2298  *
2299  * If the matched tag is a branch tag, find the head of the branch.
2300  *
2301  * Returns pointer to newly malloc'd string, or NULL.
2302  */
2303 char *
2304 RCS_gettag (RCSNode *rcs, const char *symtag, int force_tag_match,
2305             int *simple_tag)
2306 {
2307     char *tag;
2308 
2309     if (simple_tag != NULL)
2310 	*simple_tag = 0;
2311 
2312     /* make sure we have something to look at... */
2313     assert (rcs != NULL);
2314 
2315     /* XXX this is probably not necessary, --jtc */
2316     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
2317 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
2318 
2319     /* If symtag is "HEAD", special case to get head RCS revision */
2320     if (symtag && STREQ (symtag, TAG_HEAD))
2321 #if 0 /* This #if 0 is only in the Cygnus code.  Why?  Death support?  */
2322 	if (force_tag_match && (rcs->flags & VALID) && (rcs->flags & INATTIC))
2323 	    return NULL;	/* head request for removed file */
2324 	else
2325 #endif
2326 	    return RCS_head (rcs);
2327 
2328     if (!isdigit ((unsigned char) symtag[0]))
2329     {
2330 	char *version;
2331 
2332 	/* If we got a symbolic tag, resolve it to a numeric */
2333 	version = translate_symtag (rcs, symtag);
2334 	if (version != NULL)
2335 	{
2336 	    int dots;
2337 	    char *magic, *branch, *cp;
2338 
2339 	    tag = version;
2340 
2341 	    /*
2342 	     * If this is a magic revision, we turn it into either its
2343 	     * physical branch equivalent (if one exists) or into
2344 	     * its base revision, which we assume exists.
2345 	     */
2346 	    dots = numdots (tag);
2347 	    if (dots > 2 && (dots & 1) != 0)
2348 	    {
2349 		branch = strrchr (tag, '.');
2350 		cp = branch++ - 1;
2351 		while (*cp != '.')
2352 		    cp--;
2353 
2354 		/* see if we have .magic-branch. (".0.") */
2355 		magic = xmalloc (strlen (tag) + 1);
2356 		(void) sprintf (magic, ".%d.", RCS_MAGIC_BRANCH);
2357 		if (strncmp (magic, cp, strlen (magic)) == 0)
2358 		{
2359 		    /* it's magic.  See if the branch exists */
2360 		    *cp = '\0';		/* turn it into a revision */
2361 		    (void) sprintf (magic, "%s.%s", tag, branch);
2362 		    branch = RCS_getbranch (rcs, magic, 1);
2363 		    free (magic);
2364 		    if (branch != NULL)
2365 		    {
2366 			free (tag);
2367 			return branch;
2368 		    }
2369 		    return tag;
2370 		}
2371 		free (magic);
2372 	    }
2373 	}
2374 	else
2375 	{
2376 	    /* The tag wasn't there, so return the head or NULL */
2377 	    if (force_tag_match)
2378 		return NULL;
2379 	    else
2380 		return RCS_head (rcs);
2381 	}
2382     }
2383     else
2384 	tag = xstrdup (symtag);
2385 
2386     /* tag is always allocated and numeric now.  */
2387 
2388     /*
2389      * numeric tag processing:
2390      *		1) revision number - just return it
2391      *		2) branch number   - find head of branch
2392      */
2393 
2394     /* strip trailing dots */
2395     while (tag[strlen (tag) - 1] == '.')
2396 	tag[strlen (tag) - 1] = '\0';
2397 
2398     if ((numdots (tag) & 1) == 0)
2399     {
2400 	char *branch;
2401 
2402 	/* we have a branch tag, so we need to walk the branch */
2403 	branch = RCS_getbranch (rcs, tag, force_tag_match);
2404 	free (tag);
2405 	return branch;
2406     }
2407     else
2408     {
2409 	Node *p;
2410 
2411 	/* we have a revision tag, so make sure it exists */
2412 	p = findnode (rcs->versions, tag);
2413 	if (p != NULL)
2414 	{
2415 	    /* We have found a numeric revision for the revision tag.
2416 	       To support expanding the RCS keyword Name, if
2417 	       SIMPLE_TAG is not NULL, tell the the caller that this
2418 	       is a simple tag which co will recognize.  FIXME: Are
2419 	       there other cases in which we should set this?  In
2420 	       particular, what if we expand RCS keywords internally
2421 	       without calling co?  */
2422 	    if (simple_tag != NULL)
2423 		*simple_tag = 1;
2424 	    return tag;
2425 	}
2426 	else
2427 	{
2428 	    /* The revision wasn't there, so return the head or NULL */
2429 	    free (tag);
2430 	    if (force_tag_match)
2431 		return NULL;
2432 	    else
2433 		return RCS_head (rcs);
2434 	}
2435     }
2436 }
2437 
2438 
2439 
2440 /*
2441  * Return a "magic" revision as a virtual branch off of REV for the RCS file.
2442  * A "magic" revision is one which is unique in the RCS file.  By unique, I
2443  * mean we return a revision which:
2444  *	- has a branch of 0 (see rcs.h RCS_MAGIC_BRANCH)
2445  *	- has a revision component which is not an existing branch off REV
2446  *	- has a revision component which is not an existing magic revision
2447  *	- is an even-numbered revision, to avoid conflicts with vendor branches
2448  * The first point is what makes it "magic".
2449  *
2450  * As an example, if we pass in 1.37 as REV, we will look for an existing
2451  * branch called 1.37.2.  If it did not exist, we would look for an
2452  * existing symbolic tag with a numeric part equal to 1.37.0.2.  If that
2453  * didn't exist, then we know that the 1.37.2 branch can be reserved by
2454  * creating a symbolic tag with 1.37.0.2 as the numeric part.
2455  *
2456  * This allows us to fork development with very little overhead -- just a
2457  * symbolic tag is used in the RCS file.  When a commit is done, a physical
2458  * branch is dynamically created to hold the new revision.
2459  *
2460  * Note: We assume that REV is an RCS revision and not a branch number.
2461  */
2462 static char *check_rev;
2463 char *
2464 RCS_magicrev (RCSNode *rcs, char *rev)
2465 {
2466     int rev_num;
2467     char *xrev, *test_branch, *local_branch_num;
2468 
2469     xrev = xmalloc (strlen (rev) + 14); /* enough for .0.number */
2470     check_rev = xrev;
2471 
2472     local_branch_num = getenv("CVS_LOCAL_BRANCH_NUM");
2473     if (local_branch_num)
2474     {
2475       rev_num = atoi(local_branch_num);
2476       if (rev_num < 2)
2477 	rev_num = 2;
2478       else
2479 	rev_num &= ~1;
2480     }
2481     else
2482       rev_num = 2;
2483 
2484     /* only look at even numbered branches */
2485     for ( ; ; rev_num += 2)
2486     {
2487 	/* see if the physical branch exists */
2488 	(void) sprintf (xrev, "%s.%d", rev, rev_num);
2489 	test_branch = RCS_getbranch (rcs, xrev, 1);
2490 	if (test_branch != NULL)	/* it did, so keep looking */
2491 	{
2492 	    free (test_branch);
2493 	    continue;
2494 	}
2495 
2496 	/* now, create a "magic" revision */
2497 	(void) sprintf (xrev, "%s.%d.%d", rev, RCS_MAGIC_BRANCH, rev_num);
2498 
2499 	/* walk the symbols list to see if a magic one already exists */
2500 	if (walklist (RCS_symbols(rcs), checkmagic_proc, NULL) != 0)
2501 	    continue;
2502 
2503 	/* we found a free magic branch.  Claim it as ours */
2504 	return xrev;
2505     }
2506 }
2507 
2508 
2509 
2510 /*
2511  * walklist proc to look for a match in the symbols list.
2512  * Returns 0 if the symbol does not match, 1 if it does.
2513  */
2514 static int
2515 checkmagic_proc (Node *p, void *closure)
2516 {
2517     if (STREQ (check_rev, p->data))
2518 	return 1;
2519     else
2520 	return 0;
2521 }
2522 
2523 
2524 
2525 /*
2526  * Given an RCSNode, returns non-zero if the specified revision number
2527  * or symbolic tag resolves to a "branch" within the rcs file.
2528  *
2529  * FIXME: this is the same as RCS_nodeisbranch except for the special
2530  *        case for handling a null rcsnode.
2531  */
2532 int
2533 RCS_isbranch (RCSNode *rcs, const char *rev)
2534 {
2535     /* numeric revisions are easy -- even number of dots is a branch */
2536     if (isdigit ((unsigned char) *rev))
2537 	return (numdots (rev) & 1) == 0;
2538 
2539     /* assume a revision if you can't find the RCS info */
2540     if (rcs == NULL)
2541 	return 0;
2542 
2543     /* now, look for a match in the symbols list */
2544     return RCS_nodeisbranch (rcs, rev);
2545 }
2546 
2547 
2548 
2549 /*
2550  * Given an RCSNode, returns non-zero if the specified revision number
2551  * or symbolic tag resolves to a "branch" within the rcs file.  We do
2552  * take into account any magic branches as well.
2553  */
2554 int
2555 RCS_nodeisbranch (RCSNode *rcs, const char *rev)
2556 {
2557     int dots;
2558     char *version;
2559 
2560     assert (rcs != NULL);
2561 
2562     /* numeric revisions are easy -- even number of dots is a branch */
2563     if (isdigit ((unsigned char) *rev))
2564 	return (numdots (rev) & 1) == 0;
2565 
2566     version = translate_symtag (rcs, rev);
2567     if (version == NULL)
2568 	return 0;
2569     dots = numdots (version);
2570     if ((dots & 1) == 0)
2571     {
2572 	free (version);
2573 	return 1;
2574     }
2575 
2576     /* got a symbolic tag match, but it's not a branch; see if it's magic */
2577     if (dots > 2)
2578     {
2579 	char *magic;
2580 	char *branch = strrchr (version, '.');
2581 	char *cp = branch - 1;
2582 	while (*cp != '.')
2583 	    cp--;
2584 
2585 	/* see if we have .magic-branch. (".0.") */
2586 	magic = Xasprintf (".%d.", RCS_MAGIC_BRANCH);
2587 	if (strncmp (magic, cp, strlen (magic)) == 0)
2588 	{
2589 	    free (magic);
2590 	    free (version);
2591 	    return 1;
2592 	}
2593 	free (magic);
2594     }
2595     free (version);
2596     return 0;
2597 }
2598 
2599 
2600 
2601 /*
2602  * Returns a pointer to malloc'ed memory which contains the branch
2603  * for the specified *symbolic* tag.  Magic branches are handled correctly.
2604  */
2605 char *
2606 RCS_whatbranch (RCSNode *rcs, const char *rev)
2607 {
2608     char *version;
2609     int dots;
2610 
2611     /* assume no branch if you can't find the RCS info */
2612     if (rcs == NULL)
2613 	return NULL;
2614 
2615     /* now, look for a match in the symbols list */
2616     version = translate_symtag (rcs, rev);
2617     if (version == NULL)
2618 	return NULL;
2619     dots = numdots (version);
2620     if ((dots & 1) == 0)
2621 	return version;
2622 
2623     /* got a symbolic tag match, but it's not a branch; see if it's magic */
2624     if (dots > 2)
2625     {
2626 	char *magic;
2627 	char *branch = strrchr (version, '.');
2628 	char *cp = branch++ - 1;
2629 	while (*cp != '.')
2630 	    cp--;
2631 
2632 	/* see if we have .magic-branch. (".0.") */
2633 	magic = xmalloc (strlen (version) + 1);
2634 	(void) sprintf (magic, ".%d.", RCS_MAGIC_BRANCH);
2635 	if (strncmp (magic, cp, strlen (magic)) == 0)
2636 	{
2637 	    /* yep.  it's magic.  now, construct the real branch */
2638 	    *cp = '\0';			/* turn it into a revision */
2639 	    (void) sprintf (magic, "%s.%s", version, branch);
2640 	    free (version);
2641 	    return magic;
2642 	}
2643 	free (magic);
2644     }
2645     free (version);
2646     return NULL;
2647 }
2648 
2649 
2650 
2651 /*
2652  * Get the head of the specified branch.  If the branch does not exist,
2653  * return NULL or RCS_head depending on force_tag_match.
2654  * Returns NULL or a newly malloc'd string.
2655  */
2656 char *
2657 RCS_getbranch (RCSNode *rcs, const char *tag, int force_tag_match)
2658 {
2659     Node *p, *head;
2660     RCSVers *vn;
2661     char *xtag;
2662     char *nextvers;
2663     char *cp;
2664 
2665     /* make sure we have something to look at... */
2666     assert (rcs != NULL);
2667 
2668     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
2669 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
2670 
2671     /* find out if the tag contains a dot, or is on the trunk */
2672     cp = strrchr (tag, '.');
2673 
2674     /* trunk processing is the special case */
2675     if (cp == NULL)
2676     {
2677 	xtag = Xasprintf ("%s.", tag);
2678 	for (cp = rcs->head; cp != NULL;)
2679 	{
2680 	    if (strncmp (xtag, cp, strlen (xtag)) == 0)
2681 		break;
2682 	    p = findnode (rcs->versions, cp);
2683 	    if (p == NULL)
2684 	    {
2685 		free (xtag);
2686 		if (force_tag_match)
2687 		    return NULL;
2688 		else
2689 		    return RCS_head (rcs);
2690 	    }
2691 	    vn = p->data;
2692 	    cp = vn->next;
2693 	}
2694 	free (xtag);
2695 	if (cp == NULL)
2696 	{
2697 	    if (force_tag_match)
2698 		return NULL;
2699 	    else
2700 		return RCS_head (rcs);
2701 	}
2702 	return xstrdup (cp);
2703     }
2704 
2705     /* if it had a `.', terminate the string so we have the base revision */
2706     *cp = '\0';
2707 
2708     /* look up the revision this branch is based on */
2709     p = findnode (rcs->versions, tag);
2710 
2711     /* put the . back so we have the branch again */
2712     *cp = '.';
2713 
2714     if (p == NULL)
2715     {
2716 	/* if the base revision didn't exist, return head or NULL */
2717 	if (force_tag_match)
2718 	    return NULL;
2719 	else
2720 	    return RCS_head (rcs);
2721     }
2722 
2723     /* find the first element of the branch we are looking for */
2724     vn = p->data;
2725     if (vn->branches == NULL)
2726 	return NULL;
2727     xtag = Xasprintf ("%s.", tag);
2728     head = vn->branches->list;
2729     for (p = head->next; p != head; p = p->next)
2730 	if (strncmp (p->key, xtag, strlen (xtag)) == 0)
2731 	    break;
2732     free (xtag);
2733 
2734     if (p == head)
2735     {
2736 	/* we didn't find a match so return head or NULL */
2737 	if (force_tag_match)
2738 	    return NULL;
2739 	else
2740 	    return RCS_head (rcs);
2741     }
2742 
2743     /* now walk the next pointers of the branch */
2744     nextvers = p->key;
2745     do
2746     {
2747 	p = findnode (rcs->versions, nextvers);
2748 	if (p == NULL)
2749 	{
2750 	    /* a link in the chain is missing - return head or NULL */
2751 	    if (force_tag_match)
2752 		return NULL;
2753 	    else
2754 		return RCS_head (rcs);
2755 	}
2756 	vn = p->data;
2757 	nextvers = vn->next;
2758     } while (nextvers != NULL);
2759 
2760     /* we have the version in our hand, so go for it */
2761     return xstrdup (vn->version);
2762 }
2763 
2764 
2765 
2766 /* Returns the head of the branch which REV is on.  REV can be a
2767    branch tag or non-branch tag; symbolic or numeric.
2768 
2769    Returns a newly malloc'd string.  Returns NULL if a symbolic name
2770    isn't found.  */
2771 char *
2772 RCS_branch_head (RCSNode *rcs, char *rev)
2773 {
2774     char *num;
2775     char *br;
2776     char *retval;
2777 
2778     assert (rcs != NULL);
2779 
2780     if (RCS_nodeisbranch (rcs, rev))
2781 	return RCS_getbranch (rcs, rev, 1);
2782 
2783     if (isdigit ((unsigned char) *rev))
2784 	num = xstrdup (rev);
2785     else
2786     {
2787 	num = translate_symtag (rcs, rev);
2788 	if (num == NULL)
2789 	    return NULL;
2790     }
2791     br = truncate_revnum (num);
2792     retval = RCS_getbranch (rcs, br, 1);
2793     free (br);
2794     free (num);
2795     return retval;
2796 }
2797 
2798 
2799 
2800 /* Get the branch point for a particular branch, that is the first
2801    revision on that branch.  For example, RCS_getbranchpoint (rcs,
2802    "1.3.2") will normally return "1.3.2.1".  TARGET may be either a
2803    branch number or a revision number; if a revnum, find the
2804    branchpoint of the branch to which TARGET belongs.
2805 
2806    Return RCS_head if TARGET is on the trunk or if the root node could
2807    not be found (this is sort of backwards from our behavior on a branch;
2808    the rationale is that the return value is a revision from which you
2809    can start walking the next fields and end up at TARGET).
2810    Return NULL on error.  */
2811 static char *
2812 RCS_getbranchpoint (RCSNode *rcs, char *target)
2813 {
2814     char *branch, *bp;
2815     Node *vp;
2816     RCSVers *rev;
2817     int dots, isrevnum, brlen;
2818 
2819     dots = numdots (target);
2820     isrevnum = dots & 1;
2821 
2822     if (dots == 1)
2823 	/* TARGET is a trunk revision; return rcs->head. */
2824 	return RCS_head (rcs);
2825 
2826     /* Get the revision number of the node at which TARGET's branch is
2827        rooted.  If TARGET is a branch number, lop off the last field;
2828        if it's a revision number, lop off the last *two* fields. */
2829     branch = xstrdup (target);
2830     bp = strrchr (branch, '.');
2831     if (bp == NULL)
2832 	error (1, 0, "%s: confused revision number %s",
2833 	       rcs->print_path, target);
2834     if (isrevnum)
2835 	while (*--bp != '.')
2836 	    ;
2837     *bp = '\0';
2838 
2839     vp = findnode (rcs->versions, branch);
2840     if (vp == NULL)
2841     {
2842 	error (0, 0, "%s: can't find branch point %s", rcs->print_path, target);
2843 	free (branch);
2844 	return NULL;
2845     }
2846     rev = vp->data;
2847 
2848     *bp++ = '.';
2849     while (*bp && *bp != '.')
2850 	++bp;
2851     brlen = bp - branch;
2852 
2853     vp = rev->branches->list->next;
2854     while (vp != rev->branches->list)
2855     {
2856 	/* BRANCH may be a genuine branch number, e.g. `1.1.3', or
2857 	   maybe a full revision number, e.g. `1.1.3.6'.  We have
2858 	   found our branch point if the first BRANCHLEN characters
2859 	   of the revision number match, *and* if the following
2860 	   character is a dot. */
2861 	if (strncmp (vp->key, branch, brlen) == 0 && vp->key[brlen] == '.')
2862 	    break;
2863 	vp = vp->next;
2864     }
2865 
2866     free (branch);
2867     if (vp == rev->branches->list)
2868     {
2869 	error (0, 0, "%s: can't find branch point %s", rcs->print_path, target);
2870 	return NULL;
2871     }
2872     else
2873 	return xstrdup (vp->key);
2874 }
2875 
2876 
2877 
2878 /*
2879  * Get the head of the RCS file.  If branch is set, this is the head of the
2880  * branch, otherwise the real head.
2881  *
2882  * INPUTS
2883  *   rcs	The parsed rcs node information.
2884  *
2885  * RETURNS
2886  *   NULL when rcs->branch exists and cannot be found.
2887  *   A newly malloc'd string, otherwise.
2888  */
2889 char *
2890 RCS_head (RCSNode *rcs)
2891 {
2892     /* make sure we have something to look at... */
2893     assert (rcs);
2894 
2895     /*
2896      * NOTE: we call getbranch with force_tag_match set to avoid any
2897      * possibility of recursion
2898      */
2899     if (rcs->branch)
2900 	return RCS_getbranch (rcs, rcs->branch, 1);
2901     else
2902 	return xstrdup (rcs->head);
2903 }
2904 
2905 
2906 
2907 /*
2908  * Get the most recent revision, based on the supplied date, but use some
2909  * funky stuff and follow the vendor branch maybe
2910  */
2911 char *
2912 RCS_getdate (RCSNode *rcs, const char *date, int force_tag_match)
2913 {
2914     char *cur_rev = NULL;
2915     char *retval = NULL;
2916     Node *p;
2917     RCSVers *vers = NULL;
2918 
2919     /* make sure we have something to look at... */
2920     assert (rcs != NULL);
2921 
2922     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
2923 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
2924 
2925     /* if the head is on a branch, try the branch first */
2926     if (rcs->branch != NULL)
2927     {
2928 	retval = RCS_getdatebranch (rcs, date, rcs->branch);
2929 	if (retval != NULL)
2930 	    return retval;
2931     }
2932 
2933     /* otherwise if we have a trunk, try it */
2934     if (rcs->head)
2935     {
2936 	p = findnode (rcs->versions, rcs->head);
2937 	if (p == NULL)
2938 	{
2939 	    error (0, 0, "%s: head revision %s doesn't exist", rcs->print_path,
2940 		   rcs->head);
2941 	}
2942 	while (p != NULL)
2943 	{
2944 	    /* if the date of this one is before date, take it */
2945 	    vers = p->data;
2946 	    if (RCS_datecmp (vers->date, date) <= 0)
2947 	    {
2948 		cur_rev = vers->version;
2949 		break;
2950 	    }
2951 
2952 	    /* if there is a next version, find the node */
2953 	    if (vers->next != NULL)
2954 		p = findnode (rcs->versions, vers->next);
2955 	    else
2956 		p = NULL;
2957 	}
2958     }
2959     else
2960 	error (0, 0, "%s: no head revision", rcs->print_path);
2961 
2962     /*
2963      * at this point, either we have the revision we want, or we have the
2964      * first revision on the trunk (1.1?) in our hands, or we've come up
2965      * completely empty
2966      */
2967 
2968     /* if we found what we're looking for, and it's not 1.1 return it */
2969     if (cur_rev != NULL)
2970     {
2971 	if (! STREQ (cur_rev, "1.1"))
2972 	    return xstrdup (cur_rev);
2973 
2974 	/* This is 1.1;  if the date of 1.1 is not the same as that for the
2975 	   1.1.1.1 version, then return 1.1.  This happens when the first
2976 	   version of a file is created by a regular cvs add and commit,
2977 	   and there is a subsequent cvs import of the same file.  */
2978 	p = findnode (rcs->versions, "1.1.1.1");
2979 	if (p)
2980 	{
2981 	    char *date_1_1 = vers->date;
2982 
2983 	    vers = p->data;
2984 	    if (RCS_datecmp (vers->date, date_1_1) != 0)
2985 		return xstrdup ("1.1");
2986 	}
2987     }
2988 
2989     /* look on the vendor branch */
2990     retval = RCS_getdatebranch (rcs, date, CVSBRANCH);
2991 
2992     /*
2993      * if we found a match, return it; otherwise, we return the first
2994      * revision on the trunk or NULL depending on force_tag_match and the
2995      * date of the first rev
2996      */
2997     if (retval != NULL)
2998 	return retval;
2999 
3000     if (vers && (!force_tag_match || RCS_datecmp (vers->date, date) <= 0))
3001 	return xstrdup (vers->version);
3002     else
3003 	return NULL;
3004 }
3005 
3006 
3007 
3008 /*
3009  * Look up the last element on a branch that was put in before or on
3010  * the specified date and time (return the rev or NULL)
3011  */
3012 static char *
3013 RCS_getdatebranch (RCSNode *rcs, const char *date, const char *branch)
3014 {
3015     char *cur_rev = NULL;
3016     char *cp;
3017     char *xbranch, *xrev;
3018     Node *p;
3019     RCSVers *vers;
3020 
3021     /* look up the first revision on the branch */
3022     xrev = xstrdup (branch);
3023     cp = strrchr (xrev, '.');
3024     if (cp == NULL)
3025     {
3026 	free (xrev);
3027 	return NULL;
3028     }
3029     *cp = '\0';				/* turn it into a revision */
3030 
3031     assert (rcs != NULL);
3032 
3033     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
3034 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
3035 
3036     p = findnode (rcs->versions, xrev);
3037     free (xrev);
3038     if (p == NULL)
3039 	return NULL;
3040     vers = p->data;
3041 
3042     /* Tentatively use this revision, if it is early enough.  */
3043     if (RCS_datecmp (vers->date, date) <= 0)
3044 	cur_rev = vers->version;
3045 
3046     /* If no branches list, return now.  This is what happens if the branch
3047        is a (magic) branch with no revisions yet.  */
3048     if (vers->branches == NULL)
3049 	return xstrdup (cur_rev);
3050 
3051     /* walk the branches list looking for the branch number */
3052     xbranch = Xasprintf ("%s.", branch);
3053     for (p = vers->branches->list->next; p != vers->branches->list; p = p->next)
3054 	if (strncmp (p->key, xbranch, strlen (xbranch)) == 0)
3055 	    break;
3056     free (xbranch);
3057     if (p == vers->branches->list)
3058     {
3059 	/* This is what happens if the branch is a (magic) branch with
3060 	   no revisions yet.  Similar to the case where vers->branches ==
3061 	   NULL, except here there was a another branch off the same
3062 	   branchpoint.  */
3063 	return xstrdup (cur_rev);
3064     }
3065 
3066     p = findnode (rcs->versions, p->key);
3067 
3068     /* walk the next pointers until you find the end, or the date is too late */
3069     while (p != NULL)
3070     {
3071 	vers = p->data;
3072 	if (RCS_datecmp (vers->date, date) <= 0)
3073 	    cur_rev = vers->version;
3074 	else
3075 	    break;
3076 
3077 	/* if there is a next version, find the node */
3078 	if (vers->next != NULL)
3079 	    p = findnode (rcs->versions, vers->next);
3080 	else
3081 	    p = NULL;
3082     }
3083 
3084     /* Return whatever we found, which may be NULL.  */
3085     return xstrdup (cur_rev);
3086 }
3087 
3088 
3089 
3090 /*
3091  * Compare two dates in RCS format. Beware the change in format on January 1,
3092  * 2000, when years go from 2-digit to full format.
3093  */
3094 int
3095 RCS_datecmp (const char *date1, const char *date2)
3096 {
3097     int length_diff = strlen (date1) - strlen (date2);
3098 
3099     return length_diff ? length_diff : strcmp (date1, date2);
3100 }
3101 
3102 
3103 
3104 /* Look up revision REV in RCS and return the date specified for the
3105    revision minus FUDGE seconds (FUDGE will generally be one, so that the
3106    logically previous revision will be found later, or zero, if we want
3107    the exact date).
3108 
3109    The return value is the date being returned as a time_t, or (time_t)-1
3110    on error (previously was documented as zero on error; I haven't checked
3111    the callers to make sure that they really check for (time_t)-1, but
3112    the latter is what this function really returns).  If DATE is non-NULL,
3113    then it must point to MAXDATELEN characters, and we store the same
3114    return value there in DATEFORM format.  */
3115 time_t
3116 RCS_getrevtime (RCSNode *rcs, const char *rev, char *date, int fudge)
3117 {
3118     char *tdate;
3119     struct tm xtm, *ftm;
3120     struct timespec revdate;
3121     Node *p;
3122     RCSVers *vers;
3123 
3124     /* make sure we have something to look at... */
3125     assert (rcs != NULL);
3126 
3127     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
3128 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
3129 
3130     /* look up the revision */
3131     p = findnode (rcs->versions, rev);
3132     if (p == NULL)
3133 	return -1;
3134     vers = p->data;
3135 
3136     /* split up the date */
3137     if (sscanf (vers->date, SDATEFORM, &xtm.tm_year, &xtm.tm_mon,
3138 		&xtm.tm_mday, &xtm.tm_hour, &xtm.tm_min, &xtm.tm_sec) != 6)
3139 	error (1, 0, "%s: invalid date for revision %s (%s)", rcs->print_path,
3140 	       rev, vers->date);
3141 
3142     /* If the year is from 1900 to 1999, RCS files contain only two
3143        digits, and sscanf gives us a year from 0-99.  If the year is
3144        2000+, RCS files contain all four digits and we subtract 1900,
3145        because the tm_year field should contain years since 1900.  */
3146 
3147     if (xtm.tm_year >= 100 && xtm.tm_year < 2000)
3148 	error (0, 0, "%s: non-standard date format for revision %s (%s)",
3149 	       rcs->print_path, rev, vers->date);
3150     if (xtm.tm_year >= 1900)
3151 	xtm.tm_year -= 1900;
3152 
3153     /* put the date in a form getdate can grok */
3154     tdate = Xasprintf ("%d-%d-%d %d:%d:%d -0000",
3155 		       xtm.tm_year + 1900, xtm.tm_mon, xtm.tm_mday,
3156 		       xtm.tm_hour, xtm.tm_min, xtm.tm_sec);
3157 
3158     /* Turn it into seconds since the epoch.
3159      *
3160      * We use a struct timespec since that is what getdate requires, then
3161      * truncate the nanoseconds.
3162      */
3163     if (!get_date (&revdate, tdate, NULL))
3164     {
3165 	free (tdate);
3166 	return (time_t)-1;
3167     }
3168     free (tdate);
3169 
3170     revdate.tv_sec -= fudge;	/* remove "fudge" seconds */
3171     if (date)
3172     {
3173 	/* Put an appropriate string into `date', if we were given one. */
3174 	ftm = gmtime (&revdate.tv_sec);
3175 	(void) sprintf (date, DATEFORM,
3176 			ftm->tm_year + (ftm->tm_year < 100 ? 0 : 1900),
3177 			ftm->tm_mon + 1, ftm->tm_mday, ftm->tm_hour,
3178 			ftm->tm_min, ftm->tm_sec);
3179     }
3180 
3181     return revdate.tv_sec;
3182 }
3183 
3184 
3185 
3186 List *
3187 RCS_getlocks (RCSNode *rcs)
3188 {
3189     assert(rcs != NULL);
3190 
3191     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
3192 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
3193 
3194     if (rcs->locks_data) {
3195 	rcs->locks = getlist ();
3196 	do_locks (rcs->locks, rcs->locks_data);
3197 	free(rcs->locks_data);
3198 	rcs->locks_data = NULL;
3199     }
3200 
3201     return rcs->locks;
3202 }
3203 
3204 
3205 
3206 List *
3207 RCS_symbols(RCSNode *rcs)
3208 {
3209     assert(rcs != NULL);
3210 
3211     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
3212 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
3213 
3214     if (rcs->symbols_data) {
3215 	rcs->symbols = getlist ();
3216 	do_symbols (rcs->symbols, rcs->symbols_data);
3217 	free(rcs->symbols_data);
3218 	rcs->symbols_data = NULL;
3219     }
3220 
3221     return rcs->symbols;
3222 }
3223 
3224 
3225 
3226 /*
3227  * Return the version associated with a particular symbolic tag.
3228  * Returns NULL or a newly malloc'd string.
3229  */
3230 static char *
3231 translate_symtag (RCSNode *rcs, const char *tag)
3232 {
3233     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
3234 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
3235 
3236     if (rcs->symbols != NULL)
3237     {
3238 	Node *p;
3239 
3240 	/* The symbols have already been converted into a list.  */
3241 	p = findnode (rcs->symbols, tag);
3242 	if (p == NULL)
3243 	    return NULL;
3244 
3245 	return xstrdup (p->data);
3246     }
3247 
3248     if (rcs->symbols_data != NULL)
3249     {
3250 	size_t len;
3251 	char *cp, *last;
3252 
3253 	/* Look through the RCS symbols information.  This is like
3254            do_symbols, but we don't add the information to a list.  In
3255            most cases, we will only be called once for this file, so
3256            generating the list is unnecessary overhead.  */
3257 
3258 	len = strlen (tag);
3259 	cp = rcs->symbols_data;
3260 	/* Keeping track of LAST below isn't strictly necessary, now that tags
3261 	 * should be parsed for validity before they are accepted, but tags
3262 	 * with spaces used to cause the code below to loop indefintely, so
3263 	 * I have corrected for that.  Now, in the event that I missed
3264 	 * something, the server cannot be hung.  -DRP
3265 	 */
3266 	last = NULL;
3267 	while ((cp = strchr (cp, tag[0])) != NULL)
3268 	{
3269 	    if (cp == last) break;
3270 	    if ((cp == rcs->symbols_data || whitespace (cp[-1]))
3271 		&& strncmp (cp, tag, len) == 0
3272 		&& cp[len] == ':')
3273 	    {
3274 		char *v, *r;
3275 
3276 		/* We found the tag.  Return the version number.  */
3277 
3278 		cp += len + 1;
3279 		v = cp;
3280 		while (! whitespace (*cp) && *cp != '\0')
3281 		    ++cp;
3282 		r = xmalloc (cp - v + 1);
3283 		strncpy (r, v, cp - v);
3284 		r[cp - v] = '\0';
3285 		return r;
3286 	    }
3287 
3288 	    while (! whitespace (*cp) && *cp != '\0')
3289 		++cp;
3290 	    if (*cp == '\0')
3291 		break;
3292 	    last = cp;
3293 	}
3294     }
3295 
3296     return NULL;
3297 }
3298 
3299 
3300 
3301 /*
3302  * The argument ARG is the getopt remainder of the -k option specified on the
3303  * command line.  This function returns malloc'ed space that can be used
3304  * directly in calls to RCS V5, with the -k flag munged correctly.
3305  */
3306 char *
3307 RCS_check_kflag (const char *arg)
3308 {
3309     static const char *const  keyword_usage[] =
3310     {
3311       "%s %s: invalid RCS keyword expansion mode\n",
3312       "Valid expansion modes include:\n",
3313       "   -kkv\tGenerate keywords using the default form.\n",
3314       "   -kkvl\tLike -kkv, except locker's name inserted.\n",
3315       "   -kk\tGenerate only keyword names in keyword strings.\n",
3316       "   -kv\tGenerate only keyword values in keyword strings.\n",
3317       "   -ko\tGenerate the old keyword string (no changes from checked in file).\n",
3318       "   -kb\tGenerate binary file unmodified (merges not allowed) (RCS 5.7).\n",
3319       "(Specify the --help global option for a list of other help options)\n",
3320       NULL,
3321     };
3322     char const *const *cpp = NULL;
3323 
3324     if (arg)
3325     {
3326 	for (cpp = kflags; *cpp != NULL; cpp++)
3327 	{
3328 	    if (STREQ (arg, *cpp))
3329 		break;
3330 	}
3331     }
3332 
3333     if (arg == NULL || *cpp == NULL)
3334     {
3335 	usage (keyword_usage);
3336     }
3337 
3338     return Xasprintf ("-k%s", *cpp);
3339 }
3340 
3341 
3342 
3343 /*
3344  * Do some consistency checks on the symbolic tag... These should equate
3345  * pretty close to what RCS checks, though I don't know for certain.
3346  */
3347 void
3348 RCS_check_tag (const char *tag)
3349 {
3350     char *invalid = "$,.:;@";		/* invalid RCS tag characters */
3351     const char *cp;
3352 
3353     /*
3354      * The first character must be an alphabetic letter. The remaining
3355      * characters cannot be non-visible graphic characters, and must not be
3356      * in the set of "invalid" RCS identifier characters.
3357      */
3358     if (isalpha ((unsigned char) *tag))
3359     {
3360 	for (cp = tag; *cp; cp++)
3361 	{
3362 	    if (!isgraph ((unsigned char) *cp))
3363 		error (1, 0, "tag `%s' has non-visible graphic characters",
3364 		       tag);
3365 	    if (strchr (invalid, *cp))
3366 		error (1, 0, "tag `%s' must not contain the characters `%s'",
3367 		       tag, invalid);
3368 	}
3369     }
3370     else
3371 	error (1, 0, "tag `%s' must start with a letter", tag);
3372 }
3373 
3374 
3375 
3376 /*
3377  * TRUE if argument has valid syntax for an RCS revision or
3378  * branch number.  All characters must be digits or dots, first
3379  * and last characters must be digits, and no two consecutive
3380  * characters may be dots.
3381  *
3382  * Intended for classifying things, so this function doesn't
3383  * call error.
3384  */
3385 int
3386 RCS_valid_rev (const char *rev)
3387 {
3388    char last, c;
3389    last = *rev++;
3390    if (!isdigit ((unsigned char) last))
3391        return 0;
3392    while ((c = *rev++))   /* Extra parens placate -Wall gcc option */
3393    {
3394        if (c == '.')
3395        {
3396            if (last == '.')
3397                return 0;
3398            continue;
3399        }
3400        last = c;
3401        if (!isdigit ((unsigned char) c))
3402            return 0;
3403    }
3404    if (!isdigit ((unsigned char) last))
3405        return 0;
3406    return 1;
3407 }
3408 
3409 
3410 
3411 /*
3412  * Return true if RCS revision with TAG is a dead revision.
3413  */
3414 int
3415 RCS_isdead (RCSNode *rcs, const char *tag)
3416 {
3417     Node *p;
3418     RCSVers *version;
3419 
3420     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
3421 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
3422 
3423     p = findnode (rcs->versions, tag);
3424     if (p == NULL)
3425 	return 0;
3426 
3427     version = p->data;
3428     return version->dead;
3429 }
3430 
3431 
3432 
3433 /* Return the RCS keyword expansion mode.  For example "b" for binary.
3434    Returns a pointer into storage which is allocated and freed along with
3435    the rest of the RCS information; the caller should not modify this
3436    storage.  Returns NULL if the RCS file does not specify a keyword
3437    expansion mode; for all other errors, die with a fatal error.  */
3438 char *
3439 RCS_getexpand (RCSNode *rcs)
3440 {
3441     /* Since RCS_parsercsfile_i now reads expand, don't need to worry
3442        about RCS_reparsercsfile.  */
3443     assert (rcs != NULL);
3444     return rcs->expand;
3445 }
3446 
3447 
3448 
3449 /* Set keyword expansion mode to EXPAND.  For example "b" for binary.  */
3450 void
3451 RCS_setexpand (RCSNode *rcs, const char *expand)
3452 {
3453     /* Since RCS_parsercsfile_i now reads expand, don't need to worry
3454        about RCS_reparsercsfile.  */
3455     assert (rcs != NULL);
3456     if (rcs->expand != NULL)
3457 	free (rcs->expand);
3458     rcs->expand = xstrdup (expand);
3459 }
3460 
3461 
3462 
3463 /* RCS keywords, and a matching enum.  */
3464 enum keyword
3465 {
3466     KEYWORD_AUTHOR = 0,
3467     KEYWORD_DATE,
3468     KEYWORD_CVSHEADER,
3469     KEYWORD_HEADER,
3470     KEYWORD_ID,
3471     KEYWORD_LOCKER,
3472     KEYWORD_LOG,
3473     KEYWORD_NAME,
3474     KEYWORD_RCSFILE,
3475     KEYWORD_REVISION,
3476     KEYWORD_SOURCE,
3477     KEYWORD_STATE,
3478     KEYWORD_LOCALID
3479 };
3480 struct rcs_keyword
3481 {
3482     const char *string;
3483     size_t len;
3484     enum keyword expandto;
3485     bool expandit;
3486 };
3487 
3488 
3489 
3490 static inline struct rcs_keyword *
3491 new_keywords (void)
3492 {
3493     struct rcs_keyword *new;
3494     new = xcalloc (KEYWORD_LOCALID + 2, sizeof (struct rcs_keyword));
3495 
3496 #define KEYWORD_INIT(k, i, s) \
3497 	k[i].string = s; \
3498 	k[i].len = sizeof s - 1; \
3499 	k[i].expandto = i; \
3500 	k[i].expandit = true
3501 
3502     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_AUTHOR, "Author");
3503     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_DATE, "Date");
3504     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_CVSHEADER, "CVSHeader");
3505     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_HEADER, "Header");
3506     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_ID, "Id");
3507     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_LOCKER, "Locker");
3508     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_LOG, "Log");
3509     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_NAME, "Name");
3510     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_RCSFILE, "RCSfile");
3511     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_REVISION, "Revision");
3512     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_SOURCE, "Source");
3513     KEYWORD_INIT (new, KEYWORD_STATE, "State");
3514 
3515     /* Per default, expand local keyword like Id */
3516     new[KEYWORD_LOCALID].expandto = KEYWORD_ID;
3517 
3518     return new;
3519 }
3520 
3521 
3522 
3523 void
3524 free_keywords (void *keywords)
3525 {
3526     free (keywords);
3527 }
3528 
3529 
3530 
3531 /* Convert an RCS date string into a readable string.  This is like
3532    the RCS date2str function.  */
3533 static char *
3534 printable_date (const char *rcs_date)
3535 {
3536     int year, mon, mday, hour, min, sec;
3537     char buf[100];
3538 
3539     (void) sscanf (rcs_date, SDATEFORM, &year, &mon, &mday, &hour, &min,
3540 		   &sec);
3541     if (year < 1900)
3542 	year += 1900;
3543     sprintf (buf, "%04d/%02d/%02d %02d:%02d:%02d", year, mon, mday,
3544 	     hour, min, sec);
3545     return xstrdup (buf);
3546 }
3547 
3548 
3549 
3550 /* Escape the characters in a string so that it can be included in an
3551    RCS value.  */
3552 static char *
3553 escape_keyword_value (const char *value, int *free_value)
3554 {
3555     char *ret, *t;
3556     const char *s;
3557 
3558     for (s = value; *s != '\0'; s++)
3559     {
3560 	char c;
3561 
3562 	c = *s;
3563 	if (c == '\t'
3564 	    || c == '\n'
3565 	    || c == '\\'
3566 	    || c == ' '
3567 	    || c == '$')
3568 	{
3569 	    break;
3570 	}
3571     }
3572 
3573     if (*s == '\0')
3574     {
3575 	*free_value = 0;
3576 	return (char *) value;
3577     }
3578 
3579     ret = xmalloc (strlen (value) * 4 + 1);
3580     *free_value = 1;
3581 
3582     for (s = value, t = ret; *s != '\0'; s++, t++)
3583     {
3584 	switch (*s)
3585 	{
3586 	default:
3587 	    *t = *s;
3588 	    break;
3589 	case '\t':
3590 	    *t++ = '\\';
3591 	    *t = 't';
3592 	    break;
3593 	case '\n':
3594 	    *t++ = '\\';
3595 	    *t = 'n';
3596 	    break;
3597 	case '\\':
3598 	    *t++ = '\\';
3599 	    *t = '\\';
3600 	    break;
3601 	case ' ':
3602 	    *t++ = '\\';
3603 	    *t++ = '0';
3604 	    *t++ = '4';
3605 	    *t = '0';
3606 	    break;
3607 	case '$':
3608 	    *t++ = '\\';
3609 	    *t++ = '0';
3610 	    *t++ = '4';
3611 	    *t = '4';
3612 	    break;
3613 	}
3614     }
3615 
3616     *t = '\0';
3617 
3618     return ret;
3619 }
3620 
3621 
3622 
3623 /* Expand RCS keywords in the memory buffer BUF of length LEN.  This
3624    applies to file RCS and version VERS.  If NAME is not NULL, and is
3625    not a numeric revision, then it is the symbolic tag used for the
3626    checkout.  EXPAND indicates how to expand the keywords.  This
3627    function sets *RETBUF and *RETLEN to the new buffer and length.
3628    This function may modify the buffer BUF.  If BUF != *RETBUF, then
3629    RETBUF is a newly allocated buffer.  */
3630 static void
3631 expand_keywords (RCSNode *rcs, RCSVers *ver, const char *name, const char *log,
3632 		 size_t loglen, enum kflag expand, char *buf, size_t len,
3633 		 char **retbuf, size_t *retlen)
3634 {
3635     struct expand_buffer
3636     {
3637 	struct expand_buffer *next;
3638 	char *data;
3639 	size_t len;
3640 	int free_data;
3641     } *ebufs = NULL;
3642     struct expand_buffer *ebuf_last = NULL;
3643     size_t ebuf_len = 0;
3644     char *locker;
3645     char *srch, *srch_next;
3646     size_t srch_len;
3647     const struct rcs_keyword *keywords;
3648 
3649     if (!config /* For `cvs init', config may not be set.  */
3650 	||expand == KFLAG_O || expand == KFLAG_B)
3651     {
3652 	*retbuf = buf;
3653 	*retlen = len;
3654 	return;
3655     }
3656 
3657     if (!config->keywords) config->keywords = new_keywords ();
3658     keywords = config->keywords;
3659 
3660     /* If we are using -kkvl, dig out the locker information if any.  */
3661     locker = NULL;
3662     if (expand == KFLAG_KVL)
3663     {
3664 	Node *lock;
3665 	lock = findnode (RCS_getlocks(rcs), ver->version);
3666 	if (lock != NULL)
3667 	    locker = xstrdup (lock->data);
3668     }
3669 
3670     /* RCS keywords look like $STRING$ or $STRING: VALUE$.  */
3671     srch = buf;
3672     srch_len = len;
3673     while ((srch_next = memchr (srch, '$', srch_len)) != NULL)
3674     {
3675 	char *s, *send;
3676 	size_t slen;
3677 	const struct rcs_keyword *keyword;
3678 	char *value;
3679 	int free_value;
3680 	char *sub;
3681 	size_t sublen;
3682 
3683 	srch_len -= (srch_next + 1) - srch;
3684 	srch = srch_next + 1;
3685 
3686 	/* Look for the first non alphabetic character after the '$'.  */
3687 	send = srch + srch_len;
3688 	for (s = srch; s < send; s++)
3689 	    if (! isalpha ((unsigned char) *s))
3690 		break;
3691 
3692 	/* If the first non alphabetic character is not '$' or ':',
3693            then this is not an RCS keyword.  */
3694 	if (s == send || (*s != '$' && *s != ':'))
3695 	    continue;
3696 
3697 	/* See if this is one of the keywords.  */
3698 	slen = s - srch;
3699 	for (keyword = keywords; keyword->string != NULL; keyword++)
3700 	{
3701 	    if (keyword->expandit
3702 		&& keyword->len == slen
3703 		&& strncmp (keyword->string, srch, slen) == 0)
3704 	    {
3705 		break;
3706 	    }
3707 	}
3708 	if (keyword->string == NULL)
3709 	    continue;
3710 
3711 	/* If the keyword ends with a ':', then the old value consists
3712            of the characters up to the next '$'.  If there is no '$'
3713            before the end of the line, though, then this wasn't an RCS
3714            keyword after all.  */
3715 	if (*s == ':')
3716 	{
3717 	    for (; s < send; s++)
3718 		if (*s == '$' || *s == '\n')
3719 		    break;
3720 	    if (s == send || *s != '$')
3721 		continue;
3722 	}
3723 
3724 	/* At this point we must replace the string from SRCH to S
3725            with the expansion of the keyword KW.  */
3726 
3727 	/* Get the value to use.  */
3728 	free_value = 0;
3729 	if (expand == KFLAG_K)
3730 	    value = NULL;
3731 	else
3732 	{
3733 	    switch (keyword->expandto)
3734 	    {
3735 	    default:
3736 		assert (!"unreached");
3737 
3738 	    case KEYWORD_AUTHOR:
3739 		value = ver->author;
3740 		break;
3741 
3742 	    case KEYWORD_DATE:
3743 		value = printable_date (ver->date);
3744 		free_value = 1;
3745 		break;
3746 
3747 	    case KEYWORD_CVSHEADER:
3748 	    case KEYWORD_HEADER:
3749 	    case KEYWORD_ID:
3750 	    case KEYWORD_LOCALID:
3751 		{
3752 		    const char *path;
3753 		    int free_path;
3754 		    char *date;
3755 		    char *old_path;
3756 
3757 		    old_path = NULL;
3758 		    if (keyword->expandto == KEYWORD_HEADER)
3759 			path = rcs->print_path;
3760 		    else if (keyword->expandto == KEYWORD_CVSHEADER)
3761 			path = getfullCVSname (rcs->print_path, &old_path);
3762 		    else
3763 			path = last_component (rcs->print_path);
3764 		    path = escape_keyword_value (path, &free_path);
3765 		    date = printable_date (ver->date);
3766 		    value = Xasprintf ("%s %s %s %s %s%s%s",
3767 				       path, ver->version, date, ver->author,
3768 				       ver->state,
3769 				       locker != NULL ? " " : "",
3770 				       locker != NULL ? locker : "");
3771 		    if (free_path)
3772 			/* If free_path is set then we know we allocated path
3773 			 * and we can discard the const.
3774 			 */
3775 			free ((char *)path);
3776 		    if (old_path)
3777 			free (old_path);
3778 		    free (date);
3779 		    free_value = 1;
3780 		}
3781 		break;
3782 
3783 	    case KEYWORD_LOCKER:
3784 		value = locker;
3785 		break;
3786 
3787 	    case KEYWORD_LOG:
3788 	    case KEYWORD_RCSFILE:
3789 		value = escape_keyword_value (last_component (rcs->print_path),
3790 					      &free_value);
3791 		break;
3792 
3793 	    case KEYWORD_NAME:
3794 		if (name != NULL && ! isdigit ((unsigned char) *name))
3795 		    value = (char *) name;
3796 		else
3797 		    value = NULL;
3798 		break;
3799 
3800 	    case KEYWORD_REVISION:
3801 		value = ver->version;
3802 		break;
3803 
3804 	    case KEYWORD_SOURCE:
3805 		value = escape_keyword_value (rcs->print_path, &free_value);
3806 		break;
3807 
3808 	    case KEYWORD_STATE:
3809 		value = ver->state;
3810 		break;
3811 	    }
3812 	}
3813 
3814 	sub = xmalloc (keyword->len
3815 		       + (value == NULL ? 0 : strlen (value))
3816 		       + 10);
3817 	if (expand == KFLAG_V)
3818 	{
3819 	    /* Decrement SRCH and increment S to remove the $
3820                characters.  */
3821 	    --srch;
3822 	    ++srch_len;
3823 	    ++s;
3824 	    sublen = 0;
3825 	}
3826 	else
3827 	{
3828 	    strcpy (sub, keyword->string);
3829 	    sublen = strlen (keyword->string);
3830 	    if (expand != KFLAG_K)
3831 	    {
3832 		sub[sublen] = ':';
3833 		sub[sublen + 1] = ' ';
3834 		sublen += 2;
3835 	    }
3836 	}
3837 	if (value != NULL)
3838 	{
3839 	    strcpy (sub + sublen, value);
3840 	    sublen += strlen (value);
3841 	}
3842 	if (expand != KFLAG_V && expand != KFLAG_K)
3843 	{
3844 	    sub[sublen] = ' ';
3845 	    ++sublen;
3846 	    sub[sublen] = '\0';
3847 	}
3848 
3849 	if (free_value)
3850 	    free (value);
3851 
3852 	/* The Log keyword requires special handling.  This behaviour
3853            is taken from RCS 5.7.  The special log message is what RCS
3854            uses for ci -k.  */
3855 	if (keyword->expandto == KEYWORD_LOG
3856 	    && (sizeof "checked in with -k by " <= loglen
3857 		|| log == NULL
3858 		|| strncmp (log, "checked in with -k by ",
3859 			    sizeof "checked in with -k by " - 1) != 0))
3860 	{
3861 	    char *start;
3862 	    char *leader;
3863 	    size_t leader_len, leader_sp_len;
3864 	    const char *logend;
3865 	    const char *snl;
3866 	    int cnl;
3867 	    char *date;
3868 	    const char *sl;
3869 
3870 	    /* We are going to insert the trailing $ ourselves, before
3871                the log message, so we must remove it from S, if we
3872                haven't done so already.  */
3873 	    if (expand != KFLAG_V)
3874 		++s;
3875 
3876 	    /* CVS never has empty log messages, but old RCS files might.  */
3877 	    if (log == NULL)
3878 		log = "";
3879 
3880 	    /* Find the start of the line.  */
3881 	    start = srch;
3882 	    leader_len = 0;
3883 	    while (start > buf && start[-1] != '\n'
3884 		   && leader_len <= xsum (config->MaxCommentLeaderLength,
3885 					  expand != KFLAG_V ? 1 : 0))
3886 	    {
3887 		--start;
3888 		++leader_len;
3889 	    }
3890 
3891 	    if (expand != KFLAG_V)
3892 		/* When automagically determined and !KFLAG_V, we wish to avoid
3893 		 * including the leading `$' of the Log keyword in our leader.
3894 		 */
3895 		--leader_len;
3896 
3897 	    /* If the automagically determined leader exceeds the limit set in
3898 	     * CVSROOT/config, try to use a fallback.
3899 	     */
3900 	    if (leader_len > config->MaxCommentLeaderLength)
3901 	    {
3902 		if (config->UseArchiveCommentLeader && rcs->comment)
3903 		{
3904 		    leader = xstrdup (rcs->comment);
3905 		    leader_len = strlen (rcs->comment);
3906 		}
3907 		else
3908 		{
3909 		    error (0, 0,
3910 "Skipping `$" "Log$' keyword due to excessive comment leader.");
3911 		    continue;
3912 		}
3913 	    }
3914 	    else /* leader_len <= config->MaxCommentLeaderLength */
3915 	    {
3916 		/* Copy the start of the line to use as a comment leader.  */
3917 		leader = xmalloc (leader_len);
3918 		memcpy (leader, start, leader_len);
3919 	    }
3920 
3921 	    leader_sp_len = leader_len;
3922 	    while (leader_sp_len > 0 && isspace (leader[leader_sp_len - 1]))
3923 		--leader_sp_len;
3924 
3925 	    /* RCS does some checking for an old style of Log here,
3926 	       but we don't bother.  RCS issues a warning if it
3927 	       changes anything.  */
3928 
3929 	    /* Count the number of newlines in the log message so that
3930 	       we know how many copies of the leader we will need.  */
3931 	    cnl = 0;
3932 	    logend = log + loglen;
3933 	    for (snl = log; snl < logend; snl++)
3934 		if (*snl == '\n')
3935 		    ++cnl;
3936 
3937 	    /* If the log message did not end in a newline, increment
3938 	     * the newline count so we have space for the extra leader.
3939 	     * Failure to do so results in a buffer overrun.
3940 	     */
3941 	    if (loglen && snl[-1] != '\n')
3942 		++cnl;
3943 
3944 	    date = printable_date (ver->date);
3945 	    sub = xrealloc (sub,
3946 			    (sublen
3947 			     + sizeof "Revision"
3948 			     + strlen (ver->version)
3949 			     + strlen (date)
3950 			     + strlen (ver->author)
3951 			     + loglen
3952 			       /* Use CNL + 2 below:  One leader for each log
3953 				* line, plus the Revision/Author/Date line,
3954 				* plus a trailing blank line.
3955 				*/
3956 			     + (cnl + 2) * leader_len
3957 			     + 20));
3958 	    if (expand != KFLAG_V)
3959 	    {
3960 		sub[sublen] = '$';
3961 		++sublen;
3962 	    }
3963 	    sub[sublen] = '\n';
3964 	    ++sublen;
3965 	    memcpy (sub + sublen, leader, leader_len);
3966 	    sublen += leader_len;
3967 	    sprintf (sub + sublen, "Revision %s  %s  %s\n",
3968 		     ver->version, date, ver->author);
3969 	    sublen += strlen (sub + sublen);
3970 	    free (date);
3971 
3972 	    sl = log;
3973 	    while (sl < logend)
3974 	    {
3975 		if (*sl == '\n')
3976 		{
3977 		    memcpy (sub + sublen, leader, leader_sp_len);
3978 		    sublen += leader_sp_len;
3979 		    sub[sublen] = '\n';
3980 		    ++sublen;
3981 		    ++sl;
3982 		}
3983 		else
3984 		{
3985 		    const char *slnl;
3986 
3987 		    memcpy (sub + sublen, leader, leader_len);
3988 		    sublen += leader_len;
3989 		    for (slnl = sl; slnl < logend && *slnl != '\n'; ++slnl)
3990 			;
3991 		    if (slnl < logend)
3992 			++slnl;
3993 		    memcpy (sub + sublen, sl, slnl - sl);
3994 		    sublen += slnl - sl;
3995 		    if (slnl == logend && slnl[-1] != '\n')
3996 		    {
3997 			/* There was no EOL at the end of the log message.  Add
3998 			 * one.
3999 			 */
4000 			sub[sublen] = '\n';
4001 			++sublen;
4002 		    }
4003 		    sl = slnl;
4004 		}
4005 	    }
4006 
4007 	    memcpy (sub + sublen, leader, leader_sp_len);
4008 	    sublen += leader_sp_len;
4009 
4010 	    free (leader);
4011 	}
4012 
4013 	/* Now SUB contains a string which is to replace the string
4014 	   from SRCH to S.  SUBLEN is the length of SUB.  */
4015 
4016 	if (srch + sublen == s)
4017 	{
4018 	    memcpy (srch, sub, sublen);
4019 	    free (sub);
4020 	}
4021 	else
4022 	{
4023 	    struct expand_buffer *ebuf;
4024 
4025 	    /* We need to change the size of the buffer.  We build a
4026                list of expand_buffer structures.  Each expand_buffer
4027                structure represents a portion of the final output.  We
4028                concatenate them back into a single buffer when we are
4029                done.  This minimizes the number of potentially large
4030                buffer copies we must do.  */
4031 
4032 	    if (ebufs == NULL)
4033 	    {
4034 		ebufs = xmalloc (sizeof *ebuf);
4035 		ebufs->next = NULL;
4036 		ebufs->data = buf;
4037 		ebufs->free_data = 0;
4038 		ebuf_len = srch - buf;
4039 		ebufs->len = ebuf_len;
4040 		ebuf_last = ebufs;
4041 	    }
4042 	    else
4043 	    {
4044 		assert (srch >= ebuf_last->data);
4045 		assert (srch <= ebuf_last->data + ebuf_last->len);
4046 		ebuf_len -= ebuf_last->len - (srch - ebuf_last->data);
4047 		ebuf_last->len = srch - ebuf_last->data;
4048 	    }
4049 
4050 	    ebuf = xmalloc (sizeof *ebuf);
4051 	    ebuf->data = sub;
4052 	    ebuf->len = sublen;
4053 	    ebuf->free_data = 1;
4054 	    ebuf->next = NULL;
4055 	    ebuf_last->next = ebuf;
4056 	    ebuf_last = ebuf;
4057 	    ebuf_len += sublen;
4058 
4059 	    ebuf = xmalloc (sizeof *ebuf);
4060 	    ebuf->data = s;
4061 	    ebuf->len = srch_len - (s - srch);
4062 	    ebuf->free_data = 0;
4063 	    ebuf->next = NULL;
4064 	    ebuf_last->next = ebuf;
4065 	    ebuf_last = ebuf;
4066 	    ebuf_len += srch_len - (s - srch);
4067 	}
4068 
4069 	srch_len -= (s - srch);
4070 	srch = s;
4071     }
4072 
4073     if (locker != NULL)
4074 	free (locker);
4075 
4076     if (ebufs == NULL)
4077     {
4078 	*retbuf = buf;
4079 	*retlen = len;
4080     }
4081     else
4082     {
4083 	char *ret;
4084 
4085 	ret = xmalloc (ebuf_len);
4086 	*retbuf = ret;
4087 	*retlen = ebuf_len;
4088 	while (ebufs != NULL)
4089 	{
4090 	    struct expand_buffer *next;
4091 
4092 	    memcpy (ret, ebufs->data, ebufs->len);
4093 	    ret += ebufs->len;
4094 	    if (ebufs->free_data)
4095 		free (ebufs->data);
4096 	    next = ebufs->next;
4097 	    free (ebufs);
4098 	    ebufs = next;
4099 	}
4100     }
4101 }
4102 
4103 
4104 
4105 /* Check out a revision from an RCS file.
4106 
4107    If PFN is not NULL, then ignore WORKFILE and SOUT.  Call PFN zero
4108    or more times with the contents of the file.  CALLERDAT is passed,
4109    uninterpreted, to PFN.  (The current code will always call PFN
4110    exactly once for a non empty file; however, the current code
4111    assumes that it can hold the entire file contents in memory, which
4112    is not a good assumption, and might change in the future).
4113 
4114    Otherwise, if WORKFILE is not NULL, check out the revision to
4115    WORKFILE.  However, if WORKFILE is not NULL, and noexec is set,
4116    then don't do anything.
4117 
4118    Otherwise, if WORKFILE is NULL, check out the revision to SOUT.  If
4119    SOUT is RUN_TTY, then write the contents of the revision to
4120    standard output.  When using SOUT, the output is generally a
4121    temporary file; don't bother to get the file modes correct.  When
4122    NOEXEC is set, WORKFILEs are not written but SOUTs are.
4123 
4124    REV is the numeric revision to check out.  It may be NULL, which
4125    means to check out the head of the default branch.
4126 
4127    If NAMETAG is not NULL, and is not a numeric revision, then it is
4128    the tag that should be used when expanding the RCS Name keyword.
4129 
4130    OPTIONS is a string such as "-kb" or "-kv" for keyword expansion
4131    options.  It may be NULL to use the default expansion mode of the
4132    file, typically "-kkv".
4133 
4134    On an error which prevented checking out the file, either print a
4135    nonfatal error and return 1, or give a fatal error.  On success,
4136    return 0.  */
4137 
4138 /* This function mimics the behavior of `rcs co' almost exactly.  The
4139    chief difference is in its support for preserving file ownership,
4140    permissions, and special files across checkin and checkout -- see
4141    comments in RCS_checkin for some issues about this. -twp */
4142 int
4143 RCS_checkout (RCSNode *rcs, const char *workfile, const char *rev,
4144               const char *nametag, const char *options, const char *sout,
4145               RCSCHECKOUTPROC pfn, void *callerdat)
4146 {
4147     int free_rev = 0;
4148     enum kflag expand;
4149     FILE *fp,
4150 	 *ofp = NULL; /* Initialize since -Wall doesn't understand that
4151 		       * error (1, ...) does not return.
4152 		       */
4153     struct stat sb;
4154     struct rcsbuffer rcsbuf;
4155     char *key;
4156     char *value;
4157     size_t len;
4158     int free_value = 0;
4159     char *log = NULL;
4160     size_t loglen = 0;
4161     Node *vp = NULL;
4162 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
4163     uid_t rcs_owner = (uid_t) -1;
4164     gid_t rcs_group = (gid_t) -1;
4165     mode_t rcs_mode;
4166     int change_rcs_owner_or_group = 0;
4167     int change_rcs_mode = 0;
4168     int special_file = 0;
4169     unsigned long devnum_long;
4170     dev_t devnum = 0;
4171 #endif
4172 
4173     TRACE (TRACE_FUNCTION, "RCS_checkout (%s, %s, %s, %s, %s)",
4174 	   rcs->path,
4175 	   rev != NULL ? rev : "",
4176 	   nametag != NULL ? nametag : "",
4177 	   options != NULL ? options : "",
4178 	   (pfn != NULL ? "(function)"
4179 	    : (workfile != NULL ? workfile
4180 	       : (sout != RUN_TTY ? sout
4181 		  : "(stdout)"))));
4182 
4183     assert (rev == NULL || isdigit ((unsigned char) *rev));
4184 
4185     if (noexec && !server_active && workfile != NULL)
4186 	return 0;
4187 
4188     assert (sout == RUN_TTY || workfile == NULL);
4189     assert (pfn == NULL || (sout == RUN_TTY && workfile == NULL));
4190 
4191     /* Some callers, such as Checkin or remove_file, will pass us a
4192        branch.  */
4193     if (rev != NULL && (numdots (rev) & 1) == 0)
4194     {
4195 	rev = RCS_getbranch (rcs, rev, 1);
4196 	if (rev == NULL)
4197 	    error (1, 0, "internal error: bad branch tag in checkout");
4198 	free_rev = 1;
4199     }
4200 
4201     if (rev == NULL || STREQ (rev, rcs->head))
4202     {
4203 	int gothead;
4204 
4205 	/* We want the head revision.  Try to read it directly.  */
4206 
4207 	if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
4208 	    RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, &fp, &rcsbuf);
4209 	else
4210 	    rcsbuf_cache_open (rcs, rcs->delta_pos, &fp, &rcsbuf);
4211 
4212 	gothead = 0;
4213 	if (! rcsbuf_getrevnum (&rcsbuf, &key))
4214 	    error (1, 0, "unexpected EOF reading %s", rcs->print_path);
4215 	while (rcsbuf_getkey (&rcsbuf, &key, &value))
4216 	{
4217 	    if (STREQ (key, "log"))
4218 	    {
4219 		if (log)
4220 		{
4221 		    error (0, 0,
4222 "Duplicate log keyword found for head revision in RCS file.");
4223 		    free (log);
4224 		}
4225 		log = rcsbuf_valcopy (&rcsbuf, value, 0, &loglen);
4226 	    }
4227 	    else if (STREQ (key, "text"))
4228 	    {
4229 		gothead = 1;
4230 		break;
4231 	    }
4232 	}
4233 
4234 	if (! gothead)
4235 	{
4236 	    error (0, 0, "internal error: cannot find head text");
4237 	    if (free_rev)
4238 		/* It's okay to discard the const when free_rev is set, because
4239 		 * we know we allocated it in this function.
4240 		 */
4241 		free ((char *)rev);
4242 	    return 1;
4243 	}
4244 
4245 	rcsbuf_valpolish (&rcsbuf, value, 0, &len);
4246 
4247 	if (fstat (fileno (fp), &sb) < 0)
4248 	    error (1, errno, "cannot fstat %s", rcs->path);
4249 
4250 	rcsbuf_cache (rcs, &rcsbuf);
4251     }
4252     else
4253     {
4254 	struct rcsbuffer *rcsbufp;
4255 
4256 	/* It isn't the head revision of the trunk.  We'll need to
4257 	   walk through the deltas.  */
4258 
4259 	fp = NULL;
4260 	if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
4261 	    RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, &fp, &rcsbuf);
4262 
4263 	if (fp == NULL)
4264 	{
4265 	    /* If RCS_deltas didn't close the file, we could use fstat
4266 	       here too.  Probably should change it thusly....  */
4267 	    if (stat (rcs->path, &sb) < 0)
4268 		error (1, errno, "cannot stat %s", rcs->path);
4269 	    rcsbufp = NULL;
4270 	}
4271 	else
4272 	{
4273 	    if (fstat (fileno (fp), &sb) < 0)
4274 		error (1, errno, "cannot fstat %s", rcs->path);
4275 	    rcsbufp = &rcsbuf;
4276 	}
4277 
4278 	RCS_deltas (rcs, fp, rcsbufp, rev, RCS_FETCH, &value, &len,
4279 		    &log, &loglen);
4280 	free_value = 1;
4281     }
4282 
4283     /* If OPTIONS is NULL or the empty string, then the old code would
4284        invoke the RCS co program with no -k option, which means that
4285        co would use the string we have stored in rcs->expand.  */
4286     if ((options == NULL || options[0] == '\0') && rcs->expand == NULL)
4287 	expand = KFLAG_KV;
4288     else
4289     {
4290 	const char *ouroptions;
4291 	const char * const *cpp;
4292 
4293 	if (options != NULL && options[0] != '\0')
4294 	{
4295 	    assert (options[0] == '-' && options[1] == 'k');
4296 	    ouroptions = options + 2;
4297 	}
4298 	else
4299 	    ouroptions = rcs->expand;
4300 
4301 	for (cpp = kflags; *cpp != NULL; cpp++)
4302 	    if (STREQ (*cpp, ouroptions))
4303 		break;
4304 
4305 	if (*cpp != NULL)
4306 	    expand = (enum kflag) (cpp - kflags);
4307 	else
4308 	{
4309 	    error (0, 0,
4310 		   "internal error: unsupported substitution string -k%s",
4311 		   ouroptions);
4312 	    expand = KFLAG_KV;
4313 	}
4314     }
4315 
4316 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
4317     /* Handle special files and permissions, if that is desired. */
4318     if (preserve_perms)
4319     {
4320 	RCSVers *vers;
4321 	Node *info;
4322 
4323 	vp = findnode (rcs->versions, rev == NULL ? rcs->head : rev);
4324 	if (vp == NULL)
4325 	    error (1, 0, "internal error: no revision information for %s",
4326 		   rev == NULL ? rcs->head : rev);
4327 	vers = vp->data;
4328 
4329 	/* First we look for symlinks, which are simplest to handle. */
4330 	info = findnode (vers->other_delta, "symlink");
4331 	if (info != NULL)
4332 	{
4333 	    char *dest;
4334 
4335 	    if (pfn != NULL || (workfile == NULL && sout == RUN_TTY))
4336 		error (1, 0, "symbolic link %s:%s cannot be piped",
4337 		       rcs->path, vers->version);
4338 	    if (workfile == NULL)
4339 		dest = sout;
4340 	    else
4341 		dest = workfile;
4342 
4343 	    /* Remove `dest', just in case.  It's okay to get ENOENT here,
4344 	       since we just want the file not to be there.  (TODO: decide
4345 	       whether it should be considered an error for `dest' to exist
4346 	       at this point.  If so, the unlink call should be removed and
4347 	       `symlink' should signal the error. -twp) */
4348 	    if (CVS_UNLINK (dest) < 0 && !existence_error (errno))
4349 		error (1, errno, "cannot remove %s", dest);
4350 	    if (symlink (info->data, dest) < 0)
4351 		error (1, errno, "cannot create symbolic link from %s to %s",
4352 		       dest, (char *)info->data);
4353 	    if (free_value)
4354 		free (value);
4355 	    if (free_rev)
4356 		/* It's okay to discard the const when free_rev is set, because
4357 		 * we know we allocated it in this function.
4358 		 */
4359 		free ((char *)rev);
4360 	    return 0;
4361 	}
4362 
4363 	/* Next, we look at this file's hardlinks field, and see whether
4364 	   it is linked to any other file that has been checked out.
4365 	   If so, we don't do anything else -- just link it to that file.
4366 
4367 	   If we are checking out a file to a pipe or temporary storage,
4368 	   none of this should matter.  Hence the `workfile != NULL'
4369 	   wrapper around the whole thing. -twp */
4370 
4371 	if (workfile != NULL)
4372 	{
4373 	    List *links = vers->hardlinks;
4374 	    if (links != NULL)
4375 	    {
4376 		Node *uptodate_link;
4377 
4378 		/* For each file in the hardlinks field, check to see
4379 		   if it exists, and if so, if it has been checked out
4380 		   this iteration.  When walklist returns, uptodate_link
4381 		   should point to a hardlist node representing a file
4382 		   in `links' which has recently been checked out, or
4383 		   NULL if no file in `links' has yet been checked out. */
4384 
4385 		uptodate_link = NULL;
4386 		(void) walklist (links, find_checkedout_proc, &uptodate_link);
4387 		dellist (&links);
4388 
4389 		/* If we've found a file that `workfile' is supposed to be
4390 		   linked to, and it has been checked out since CVS was
4391 		   invoked, then simply link workfile to that file and return.
4392 
4393 		   If one of these conditions is not met, then
4394 		   workfile is the first one in its hardlink group to
4395 		   be checked out, and we must continue with a full
4396 		   checkout. */
4397 
4398 		if (uptodate_link != NULL)
4399 		{
4400 		    struct hardlink_info *hlinfo = uptodate_link->data;
4401 
4402 		    if (link (uptodate_link->key, workfile) < 0)
4403 			error (1, errno, "cannot link %s to %s",
4404 			       workfile, uptodate_link->key);
4405 		    hlinfo->checked_out = 1;	/* probably unnecessary */
4406 		    if (free_value)
4407 			free (value);
4408 		    if (free_rev)
4409 			/* It's okay to discard the const when free_rev is set,
4410 			 * because we know we allocated it in this function.
4411 			 */
4412 			free ((char *)rev);
4413 		    return 0;
4414 		}
4415 	    }
4416 	}
4417 
4418 	info = findnode (vers->other_delta, "owner");
4419 	if (info != NULL)
4420 	{
4421 	    change_rcs_owner_or_group = 1;
4422 	    rcs_owner = (uid_t) strtoul (info->data, NULL, 10);
4423 	}
4424 	info = findnode (vers->other_delta, "group");
4425 	if (info != NULL)
4426 	{
4427 	    change_rcs_owner_or_group = 1;
4428 	    rcs_group = (gid_t) strtoul (info->data, NULL, 10);
4429 	}
4430 	info = findnode (vers->other_delta, "permissions");
4431 	if (info != NULL)
4432 	{
4433 	    change_rcs_mode = 1;
4434 	    rcs_mode = (mode_t) strtoul (info->data, NULL, 8);
4435 	}
4436 	info = findnode (vers->other_delta, "special");
4437 	if (info != NULL)
4438 	{
4439 	    /* If the size of `devtype' changes, fix the sscanf call also */
4440 	    char devtype[16];
4441 
4442 	    if (sscanf (info->data, "%15s %lu",
4443 			devtype, &devnum_long) < 2)
4444 		error (1, 0, "%s:%s has bad `special' newphrase %s",
4445 		       workfile, vers->version, (char *)info->data);
4446 	    devnum = devnum_long;
4447 	    if (STREQ (devtype, "character"))
4448 		special_file = S_IFCHR;
4449 	    else if (STREQ (devtype, "block"))
4450 		special_file = S_IFBLK;
4451 	    else
4452 		error (0, 0, "%s is a special file of unsupported type `%s'",
4453 		       workfile, (char *)info->data);
4454 	}
4455     }
4456 #endif /* PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT */
4457 
4458     if (expand != KFLAG_O && expand != KFLAG_B)
4459     {
4460 	char *newvalue;
4461 
4462 	/* Don't fetch the delta node again if we already have it. */
4463 	if (vp == NULL)
4464 	{
4465 	    vp = findnode (rcs->versions, rev == NULL ? rcs->head : rev);
4466 	    if (vp == NULL)
4467 		error (1, 0, "internal error: no revision information for %s",
4468 		       rev == NULL ? rcs->head : rev);
4469 	}
4470 
4471 	expand_keywords (rcs, vp->data, nametag, log, loglen,
4472 			 expand, value, len, &newvalue, &len);
4473 
4474 	if (newvalue != value)
4475 	{
4476 	    if (free_value)
4477 		free (value);
4478 	    value = newvalue;
4479 	    free_value = 1;
4480 	}
4481     }
4482 
4483     if (free_rev)
4484 	/* It's okay to discard the const when free_rev is set, because
4485 	 * we know we allocated it in this function.
4486 	 */
4487 	free ((char *)rev);
4488 
4489     if (log != NULL)
4490     {
4491 	free (log);
4492 	log = NULL;
4493     }
4494 
4495     if (pfn != NULL)
4496     {
4497 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
4498 	if (special_file)
4499 	    error (1, 0, "special file %s cannot be piped to anything",
4500 		   rcs->path);
4501 #endif
4502 	/* The PFN interface is very simple to implement right now, as
4503            we always have the entire file in memory.  */
4504 	if (len != 0)
4505 	    pfn (callerdat, value, len);
4506     }
4507 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
4508     else if (special_file)
4509     {
4510 # ifdef HAVE_MKNOD
4511 	char *dest;
4512 
4513 	/* Can send either to WORKFILE or to SOUT, as long as SOUT is
4514 	   not RUN_TTY. */
4515 	dest = workfile;
4516 	if (dest == NULL)
4517 	{
4518 	    if (sout == RUN_TTY)
4519 		error (1, 0, "special file %s cannot be written to stdout",
4520 		       rcs->path);
4521 	    dest = sout;
4522 	}
4523 
4524 	/* Unlink `dest', just in case.  It's okay if this provokes a
4525 	   ENOENT error. */
4526 	if (CVS_UNLINK (dest) < 0 && existence_error (errno))
4527 	    error (1, errno, "cannot remove %s", dest);
4528 	if (mknod (dest, special_file, devnum) < 0)
4529 	    error (1, errno, "could not create special file %s",
4530 		   dest);
4531 # else
4532 	error (1, 0,
4533 "cannot create %s: unable to create special files on this system",
4534 workfile);
4535 # endif
4536     }
4537 #endif
4538     else
4539     {
4540 	/* Not a special file: write to WORKFILE or SOUT. */
4541 	if (workfile == NULL)
4542 	{
4543 	    if (sout == RUN_TTY)
4544 		ofp = stdout;
4545 	    else
4546 	    {
4547 		/* Symbolic links should be removed before replacement, so that
4548 		   `fopen' doesn't follow the link and open the wrong file. */
4549 		if (islink (sout))
4550 		    if (unlink_file (sout) < 0)
4551 			error (1, errno, "cannot remove %s", sout);
4552 		ofp = CVS_FOPEN (sout, expand == KFLAG_B ? "wb" : "w");
4553 		if (ofp == NULL)
4554 		    error (1, errno, "cannot open %s", sout);
4555 	    }
4556 	}
4557 	else
4558 	{
4559 	    /* Output is supposed to go to WORKFILE, so we should open that
4560 	       file.  Symbolic links should be removed first (see above). */
4561 	    if (islink (workfile))
4562 		if (unlink_file (workfile) < 0)
4563 		    error (1, errno, "cannot remove %s", workfile);
4564 
4565 	    ofp = CVS_FOPEN (workfile, expand == KFLAG_B ? "wb" : "w");
4566 
4567 	    /* If the open failed because the existing workfile was not
4568 	       writable, try to chmod the file and retry the open.  */
4569 	    if (ofp == NULL && errno == EACCES
4570 		&& isfile (workfile) && !iswritable (workfile))
4571 	    {
4572 		xchmod (workfile, 1);
4573 		ofp = CVS_FOPEN (workfile, expand == KFLAG_B ? "wb" : "w");
4574 	    }
4575 
4576 	    if (ofp == NULL)
4577 	    {
4578 		error (0, errno, "cannot open %s", workfile);
4579 		if (free_value)
4580 		    free (value);
4581 		return 1;
4582 	    }
4583 	}
4584 
4585 	if (workfile == NULL && sout == RUN_TTY)
4586 	{
4587 	    if (expand == KFLAG_B)
4588 		cvs_output_binary (value, len);
4589 	    else
4590 	    {
4591 		/* cvs_output requires the caller to check for zero
4592 		   length.  */
4593 		if (len > 0)
4594 		    cvs_output (value, len);
4595 	    }
4596 	}
4597 	else
4598 	{
4599 	    /* NT 4.0 is said to have trouble writing 2099999 bytes
4600 	       (for example) in a single fwrite.  So break it down
4601 	       (there is no need to be writing that much at once
4602 	       anyway; it is possible that LARGEST_FWRITE should be
4603 	       somewhat larger for good performance, but for testing I
4604 	       want to start with a small value until/unless a bigger
4605 	       one proves useful).  */
4606 #define LARGEST_FWRITE 8192
4607 	    size_t nleft = len;
4608 	    size_t nstep = (len < LARGEST_FWRITE ? len : LARGEST_FWRITE);
4609 	    char *p = value;
4610 
4611 	    while (nleft > 0)
4612 	    {
4613 		if (fwrite (p, 1, nstep, ofp) != nstep)
4614 		{
4615 		    error (0, errno, "cannot write %s",
4616 			   (workfile != NULL
4617 			    ? workfile
4618 			    : (sout != RUN_TTY ? sout : "stdout")));
4619 		    if (free_value)
4620 			free (value);
4621 		    return 1;
4622 		}
4623 		p += nstep;
4624 		nleft -= nstep;
4625 		if (nleft < nstep)
4626 		    nstep = nleft;
4627 	    }
4628 	}
4629     }
4630 
4631     if (free_value)
4632 	free (value);
4633 
4634     if (workfile != NULL)
4635     {
4636 	int ret;
4637 
4638 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
4639 	if (!special_file && fclose (ofp) < 0)
4640 	{
4641 	    error (0, errno, "cannot close %s", workfile);
4642 	    return 1;
4643 	}
4644 
4645 	if (change_rcs_owner_or_group)
4646 	{
4647 	    if (chown (workfile, rcs_owner, rcs_group) < 0)
4648 		error (0, errno, "could not change owner or group of %s",
4649 		       workfile);
4650 	}
4651 
4652 	ret = chmod (workfile,
4653 		     change_rcs_mode
4654 		     ? rcs_mode
4655 		     : sb.st_mode & ~(S_IWRITE | S_IWGRP | S_IWOTH));
4656 #else
4657 	if (fclose (ofp) < 0)
4658 	{
4659 	    error (0, errno, "cannot close %s", workfile);
4660 	    return 1;
4661 	}
4662 
4663 	ret = chmod (workfile,
4664 		     sb.st_mode & ~(S_IWRITE | S_IWGRP | S_IWOTH));
4665 #endif
4666 	if (ret < 0)
4667 	{
4668 	    error (0, errno, "cannot change mode of file %s",
4669 		   workfile);
4670 	}
4671     }
4672     else if (sout != RUN_TTY)
4673     {
4674 	if (
4675 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
4676 	    !special_file &&
4677 #endif
4678 	    fclose (ofp) < 0)
4679 	{
4680 	    error (0, errno, "cannot close %s", sout);
4681 	    return 1;
4682 	}
4683     }
4684 
4685 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
4686     /* If we are in the business of preserving hardlinks, then
4687        mark this file as having been checked out. */
4688     if (preserve_perms && workfile != NULL)
4689 	update_hardlink_info (workfile);
4690 #endif
4691 
4692     return 0;
4693 }
4694 
4695 
4696 
4697 /* Find the delta currently locked by the user.  From the `ci' man page:
4698 
4699 	"If rev is omitted, ci tries to  derive  the  new  revision
4700 	 number  from  the  caller's  last lock.  If the caller has
4701 	 locked the tip revision of a branch, the new  revision  is
4702 	 appended  to  that  branch.   The  new  revision number is
4703 	 obtained by incrementing the tip revision number.  If  the
4704 	 caller  locked a non-tip revision, a new branch is started
4705 	 at that revision by incrementing the highest branch number
4706 	 at  that  revision.   The default initial branch and level
4707 	 numbers are 1.
4708 
4709 	 If rev is omitted and the caller has no lock, but owns the
4710 	 file  and  locking is not set to strict, then the revision
4711 	 is appended to the default branch (normally the trunk; see
4712 	 the -b option of rcs(1))."
4713 
4714    RCS_findlock_or_tip finds the unique revision locked by the caller
4715    and returns its delta node.  If the caller has not locked any
4716    revisions (and is permitted to commit to an unlocked delta, as
4717    described above), return the tip of the default branch. */
4718 static RCSVers *
4719 RCS_findlock_or_tip (RCSNode *rcs)
4720 {
4721     char *user = getcaller();
4722     Node *lock, *p;
4723     List *locklist;
4724 
4725     /* Find unique delta locked by caller. This code is very similar
4726        to the code in RCS_unlock -- perhaps it could be abstracted
4727        into a RCS_findlock function. */
4728     locklist = RCS_getlocks (rcs);
4729     lock = NULL;
4730     for (p = locklist->list->next; p != locklist->list; p = p->next)
4731     {
4732 	if (STREQ (p->data, user))
4733 	{
4734 	    if (lock != NULL)
4735 	    {
4736 		error (0, 0, "\
4737 %s: multiple revisions locked by %s; please specify one", rcs->print_path, user);
4738 		return NULL;
4739 	    }
4740 	    lock = p;
4741 	}
4742     }
4743 
4744     if (lock != NULL)
4745     {
4746 	/* Found an old lock, but check that the revision still exists. */
4747 	p = findnode (rcs->versions, lock->key);
4748 	if (p == NULL)
4749 	{
4750 	    error (0, 0, "%s: can't unlock nonexistent revision %s",
4751 		   rcs->print_path,
4752 		   lock->key);
4753 	    return NULL;
4754 	}
4755 	return p->data;
4756     }
4757 
4758     /* No existing lock.  The RCS rule is that this is an error unless
4759        locking is nonstrict AND the file is owned by the current
4760        user.  Trying to determine the latter is a portability nightmare
4761        in the face of NT, VMS, AFS, and other systems with non-unix-like
4762        ideas of users and owners.  In the case of CVS, we should never get
4763        here (as long as the traditional behavior of making sure to call
4764        RCS_lock persists).  Anyway, we skip the RCS error checks
4765        and just return the default branch or head.  The reasoning is that
4766        those error checks are to make users lock before a checkin, and we do
4767        that in other ways if at all anyway (e.g. rcslock.pl).  */
4768 
4769     p = findnode (rcs->versions, RCS_getbranch (rcs, rcs->branch, 0));
4770     if (!p)
4771     {
4772 	error (0, 0, "RCS file `%s' does not contain its default revision.",
4773 	       rcs->path);
4774 	return NULL;
4775     }
4776 
4777     return p->data;
4778 }
4779 
4780 
4781 
4782 /* Revision number string, R, must contain a `.'.
4783    Return a newly-malloc'd copy of the prefix of R up
4784    to but not including the final `.'.  */
4785 static char *
4786 truncate_revnum (const char *r)
4787 {
4788     size_t len;
4789     char *new_r;
4790     char *dot = strrchr (r, '.');
4791 
4792     assert (dot);
4793     len = dot - r;
4794     new_r = xmalloc (len + 1);
4795     memcpy (new_r, r, len);
4796     *(new_r + len) = '\0';
4797     return new_r;
4798 }
4799 
4800 
4801 
4802 /* Revision number string, R, must contain a `.'.
4803    R must be writable.  Replace the rightmost `.' in R with
4804    the NUL byte and return a pointer to that NUL byte.  */
4805 static char *
4806 truncate_revnum_in_place (char *r)
4807 {
4808     char *dot = strrchr (r, '.');
4809     assert (dot);
4810     *dot = '\0';
4811     return dot;
4812 }
4813 
4814 
4815 
4816 /* Revision number strings, R and S, must each contain a `.'.
4817    R and S must be writable and must have the same number of dots.
4818    Truncate R and S for the comparison, then restored them to their
4819    original state.
4820    Return the result (see compare_revnums) of comparing R and S
4821    ignoring differences in any component after the rightmost `.'.  */
4822 static int
4823 compare_truncated_revnums (char *r, char *s)
4824 {
4825     char *r_dot = truncate_revnum_in_place (r);
4826     char *s_dot = truncate_revnum_in_place (s);
4827     int cmp;
4828 
4829     assert (numdots (r) == numdots (s));
4830 
4831     cmp = compare_revnums (r, s);
4832 
4833     *r_dot = '.';
4834     *s_dot = '.';
4835 
4836     return cmp;
4837 }
4838 
4839 
4840 
4841 /* Return a malloc'd copy of the string representing the highest branch
4842    number on BRANCHNODE.  If there are no branches on BRANCHNODE, return NULL.
4843    FIXME: isn't the max rev always the last one?
4844    If so, we don't even need a loop.  */
4845 static char *
4846 max_rev (const RCSVers *branchnode)
4847 {
4848     Node *head;
4849     Node *bp;
4850     char *max;
4851 
4852     if (branchnode->branches == NULL)
4853     {
4854         return NULL;
4855     }
4856 
4857     max = NULL;
4858     head = branchnode->branches->list;
4859     for (bp = head->next; bp != head; bp = bp->next)
4860     {
4861 	if (max == NULL || compare_truncated_revnums (max, bp->key) < 0)
4862 	{
4863 	    max = bp->key;
4864 	}
4865     }
4866     assert (max);
4867 
4868     return truncate_revnum (max);
4869 }
4870 
4871 
4872 
4873 /* Create BRANCH in RCS's delta tree.  BRANCH may be either a branch
4874    number or a revision number.  In the former case, create the branch
4875    with the specified number; in the latter case, create a new branch
4876    rooted at node BRANCH with a higher branch number than any others.
4877    Return the number of the tip node on the new branch. */
4878 static char *
4879 RCS_addbranch (RCSNode *rcs, const char *branch)
4880 {
4881     char *branchpoint, *newrevnum;
4882     Node *nodep, *bp;
4883     Node *marker;
4884     RCSVers *branchnode;
4885 
4886     assert (branch);
4887 
4888     /* Append to end by default.  */
4889     marker = NULL;
4890 
4891     branchpoint = xstrdup (branch);
4892     if ((numdots (branchpoint) & 1) == 0)
4893     {
4894 	truncate_revnum_in_place (branchpoint);
4895     }
4896 
4897     /* Find the branch rooted at BRANCHPOINT. */
4898     nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, branchpoint);
4899     if (nodep == NULL)
4900     {
4901 	error (0, 0, "%s: can't find branch point %s", rcs->print_path, branchpoint);
4902 	free (branchpoint);
4903 	return NULL;
4904     }
4905     free (branchpoint);
4906     branchnode = nodep->data;
4907 
4908     /* If BRANCH was a full branch number, make sure it is higher than MAX. */
4909     if ((numdots (branch) & 1) == 1)
4910     {
4911 	if (branchnode->branches == NULL)
4912 	{
4913 	    /* We have to create the first branch on this node, which means
4914 	       appending ".2" to the revision number. */
4915 	    newrevnum = Xasprintf ("%s.2", branch);
4916 	}
4917 	else
4918 	{
4919 	    char *max = max_rev (branchnode);
4920 	    assert (max);
4921 	    newrevnum = increment_revnum (max);
4922 	    free (max);
4923 	}
4924     }
4925     else
4926     {
4927 	newrevnum = xstrdup (branch);
4928 
4929 	if (branchnode->branches != NULL)
4930 	{
4931 	    Node *head;
4932 	    Node *bp;
4933 
4934 	    /* Find the position of this new branch in the sorted list
4935 	       of branches.  */
4936 	    head = branchnode->branches->list;
4937 	    for (bp = head->next; bp != head; bp = bp->next)
4938 	    {
4939 		char *dot;
4940 		int found_pos;
4941 
4942 		/* The existing list must be sorted on increasing revnum.  */
4943 		assert (bp->next == head
4944 			|| compare_truncated_revnums (bp->key,
4945 						      bp->next->key) < 0);
4946 		dot = truncate_revnum_in_place (bp->key);
4947 		found_pos = (compare_revnums (branch, bp->key) < 0);
4948 		*dot = '.';
4949 
4950 		if (found_pos)
4951 		{
4952 		    break;
4953 		}
4954 	    }
4955 	    marker = bp;
4956 	}
4957     }
4958 
4959     newrevnum = xrealloc (newrevnum, strlen (newrevnum) + 3);
4960     strcat (newrevnum, ".1");
4961 
4962     /* Add this new revision number to BRANCHPOINT's branches list. */
4963     if (branchnode->branches == NULL)
4964 	branchnode->branches = getlist();
4965     bp = getnode();
4966     bp->key = xstrdup (newrevnum);
4967 
4968     /* Append to the end of the list by default, that is, just before
4969        the header node, `list'.  */
4970     if (marker == NULL)
4971 	marker = branchnode->branches->list;
4972 
4973     {
4974 	int fail;
4975 	fail = insert_before (branchnode->branches, marker, bp);
4976 	assert (!fail);
4977     }
4978 
4979     return newrevnum;
4980 }
4981 
4982 
4983 
4984 /* Check in to RCSFILE with revision REV (which must be greater than
4985    the largest revision) and message MESSAGE (which is checked for
4986    validity).  If FLAGS & RCS_FLAGS_DEAD, check in a dead revision.
4987    If FLAGS & RCS_FLAGS_QUIET, tell ci to be quiet.  If FLAGS &
4988    RCS_FLAGS_MODTIME, use the working file's modification time for the
4989    checkin time.  WORKFILE is the working file to check in from, or
4990    NULL to use the usual RCS rules for deriving it from the RCSFILE.
4991    If FLAGS & RCS_FLAGS_KEEPFILE, don't unlink the working file;
4992    unlinking the working file is standard RCS behavior, but is rarely
4993    appropriate for CVS.
4994 
4995    UPDATE_DIR is used to print the path for the file.  This argument is
4996    unnecessary when FLAGS & RCS_FLAGS_QUIET since the path won't be printed
4997    anyhow.
4998 
4999    This function should almost exactly mimic the behavior of `rcs ci'.  The
5000    principal point of difference is the support here for preserving file
5001    ownership and permissions in the delta nodes.  This is not a clean
5002    solution -- precisely because it diverges from RCS's behavior -- but
5003    it doesn't seem feasible to do this anywhere else in the code. [-twp]
5004 
5005    Return value is -1 for error (and errno is set to indicate the
5006    error), positive for error (and an error message has been printed),
5007    or zero for success.  */
5008 int
5009 RCS_checkin (RCSNode *rcs, const char *update_dir, const char *workfile_in,
5010 	     const char *message, const char *rev, time_t citime, int flags)
5011 {
5012     RCSVers *delta, *commitpt;
5013     Deltatext *dtext;
5014     Node *nodep;
5015     char *tmpfile, *changefile;
5016     int dargc = 0;
5017     size_t darg_allocated = 0;
5018     char **dargv = NULL;
5019     size_t bufsize;
5020     int status, checkin_quiet;
5021     struct tm *ftm;
5022     time_t modtime;
5023     int adding_branch = 0;
5024     char *workfile = xstrdup (workfile_in);
5025 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
5026     struct stat sb;
5027 #endif
5028     Node *np;
5029 
5030     commitpt = NULL;
5031 
5032     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
5033 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
5034 
5035     /* Get basename of working file.  Is there a library function to
5036        do this?  I couldn't find one. -twp */
5037     if (workfile == NULL)
5038     {
5039 	char *p;
5040 	int extlen = strlen (RCSEXT);
5041 	assert (rcs->path);
5042 	workfile = xstrdup (last_component (rcs->path));
5043 	p = workfile + (strlen (workfile) - extlen);
5044 	assert (strncmp (p, RCSEXT, extlen) == 0);
5045 	*p = '\0';
5046     }
5047 
5048     /* If the filename is a symbolic link, follow it and replace it
5049        with the destination of the link.  We need to do this before
5050        calling rcs_internal_lockfile, or else we won't put the lock in
5051        the right place. */
5052     resolve_symlink (&(rcs->path));
5053 
5054     checkin_quiet = flags & RCS_FLAGS_QUIET;
5055     if (!(checkin_quiet || really_quiet))
5056     {
5057 	cvs_output (rcs->path, 0);
5058 	cvs_output ("  <--  ", 7);
5059 	if (update_dir && strlen (update_dir))
5060 	{
5061 	    cvs_output (update_dir, 0);
5062 	    cvs_output ("/", 1);
5063 	}
5064 	cvs_output (workfile, 0);
5065 	cvs_output ("\n", 1);
5066     }
5067 
5068     /* Create new delta node. */
5069     delta = xmalloc (sizeof (RCSVers));
5070     memset (delta, 0, sizeof (RCSVers));
5071     delta->author = xstrdup (getcaller ());
5072     if (flags & RCS_FLAGS_MODTIME)
5073     {
5074 	struct stat ws;
5075 	if (stat (workfile, &ws) < 0)
5076 	{
5077 	    error (1, errno, "cannot stat %s", workfile);
5078 	}
5079 	modtime = ws.st_mtime;
5080     }
5081     else if (flags & RCS_FLAGS_USETIME)
5082 	modtime = citime;
5083     else
5084 	(void) time (&modtime);
5085     ftm = gmtime (&modtime);
5086     delta->date = Xasprintf (DATEFORM,
5087 			     ftm->tm_year + (ftm->tm_year < 100 ? 0 : 1900),
5088 			     ftm->tm_mon + 1, ftm->tm_mday, ftm->tm_hour,
5089 			     ftm->tm_min, ftm->tm_sec);
5090     if (flags & RCS_FLAGS_DEAD)
5091     {
5092 	delta->state = xstrdup (RCSDEAD);
5093 	delta->dead = 1;
5094     }
5095     else
5096 	delta->state = xstrdup ("Exp");
5097 
5098     delta->other_delta = getlist();
5099 
5100     /* save the commit ID */
5101     np = getnode();
5102     np->type = RCSFIELD;
5103     np->key = xstrdup ("commitid");
5104     np->data = xstrdup(global_session_id);
5105     addnode (delta->other_delta, np);
5106 
5107 
5108 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
5109     /* If permissions should be preserved on this project, then
5110        save the permission info. */
5111     if (preserve_perms)
5112     {
5113 	Node *np;
5114 	char buf[64];	/* static buffer should be safe: see usage. -twp */
5115 
5116 	delta->other_delta = getlist();
5117 
5118 	if (lstat (workfile, &sb) < 0)
5119 	    error (1, errno, "cannot lstat %s", workfile);
5120 
5121 	if (S_ISLNK (sb.st_mode))
5122 	{
5123 	    np = getnode();
5124 	    np->type = RCSFIELD;
5125 	    np->key = xstrdup ("symlink");
5126 	    np->data = Xreadlink (workfile, sb.st_size);
5127 	    addnode (delta->other_delta, np);
5128 	}
5129 	else
5130 	{
5131 	    (void) sprintf (buf, "%u", sb.st_uid);
5132 	    np = getnode();
5133 	    np->type = RCSFIELD;
5134 	    np->key = xstrdup ("owner");
5135 	    np->data = xstrdup (buf);
5136 	    addnode (delta->other_delta, np);
5137 
5138 	    (void) sprintf (buf, "%u", sb.st_gid);
5139 	    np = getnode();
5140 	    np->type = RCSFIELD;
5141 	    np->key = xstrdup ("group");
5142 	    np->data = xstrdup (buf);
5143 	    addnode (delta->other_delta, np);
5144 
5145 	    (void) sprintf (buf, "%o", sb.st_mode & 07777);
5146 	    np = getnode();
5147 	    np->type = RCSFIELD;
5148 	    np->key = xstrdup ("permissions");
5149 	    np->data = xstrdup (buf);
5150 	    addnode (delta->other_delta, np);
5151 
5152 	    /* Save device number. */
5153 	    switch (sb.st_mode & S_IFMT)
5154 	    {
5155 		case S_IFREG: break;
5156 		case S_IFCHR:
5157 		case S_IFBLK:
5158 # ifdef HAVE_STRUCT_STAT_ST_RDEV
5159 		    np = getnode();
5160 		    np->type = RCSFIELD;
5161 		    np->key = xstrdup ("special");
5162 		    sprintf (buf, "%s %lu",
5163 			     ((sb.st_mode & S_IFMT) == S_IFCHR
5164 			      ? "character" : "block"),
5165 			     (unsigned long) sb.st_rdev);
5166 		    np->data = xstrdup (buf);
5167 		    addnode (delta->other_delta, np);
5168 # else
5169 		    error (0, 0,
5170 "can't preserve %s: unable to save device files on this system",
5171 workfile);
5172 # endif
5173 		    break;
5174 
5175 		default:
5176 		    error (0, 0, "special file %s has unknown type", workfile);
5177 	    }
5178 
5179 	    /* Save hardlinks. */
5180 	    delta->hardlinks = list_linked_files_on_disk (workfile);
5181 	}
5182     }
5183 #endif
5184 
5185     /* Create a new deltatext node. */
5186     dtext = xmalloc (sizeof (Deltatext));
5187     memset (dtext, 0, sizeof (Deltatext));
5188 
5189     dtext->log = make_message_rcsvalid (message);
5190 
5191     /* If the delta tree is empty, then there's nothing to link the
5192        new delta into.  So make a new delta tree, snarf the working
5193        file contents, and just write the new RCS file. */
5194     if (rcs->head == NULL)
5195     {
5196 	char *newrev;
5197 	FILE *fout;
5198 
5199 	/* Figure out what the first revision number should be. */
5200 	if (rev == NULL || *rev == '\0')
5201 	    newrev = xstrdup ("1.1");
5202 	else if (numdots (rev) == 0)
5203 	{
5204 	    newrev = Xasprintf ("%s.1", rev);
5205 	}
5206 	else
5207 	    newrev = xstrdup (rev);
5208 
5209 	/* Don't need to xstrdup NEWREV because it's already dynamic, and
5210 	   not used for anything else.  (Don't need to free it, either.) */
5211 	rcs->head = newrev;
5212 	delta->version = xstrdup (newrev);
5213 	nodep = getnode();
5214 	nodep->type = RCSVERS;
5215 	nodep->delproc = rcsvers_delproc;
5216 	nodep->data = delta;
5217 	nodep->key = delta->version;
5218 	(void) addnode (rcs->versions, nodep);
5219 
5220 	dtext->version = xstrdup (newrev);
5221 	bufsize = 0;
5222 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
5223 	if (preserve_perms && !S_ISREG (sb.st_mode))
5224 	    /* Pretend file is empty.  */
5225 	    bufsize = 0;
5226 	else
5227 #endif
5228 	get_file (workfile, workfile,
5229 		  rcs->expand != NULL && STREQ (rcs->expand, "b") ? "rb" : "r",
5230 		  &dtext->text, &bufsize, &dtext->len);
5231 
5232 	if (!(checkin_quiet || really_quiet))
5233 	{
5234 	    cvs_output ("initial revision: ", 0);
5235 	    cvs_output (rcs->head, 0);
5236 	    cvs_output ("\n", 1);
5237 	}
5238 
5239 	/* We are probably about to invalidate any cached file.  */
5240 	rcsbuf_cache_close ();
5241 
5242 	fout = rcs_internal_lockfile (rcs->path);
5243 	RCS_putadmin (rcs, fout);
5244 	RCS_putdtree (rcs, rcs->head, fout);
5245 	RCS_putdesc (rcs, fout);
5246 	rcs->delta_pos = ftello (fout);
5247 	if (rcs->delta_pos == -1)
5248 	    error (1, errno, "cannot ftello for %s", rcs->path);
5249 	putdeltatext (fout, dtext);
5250 	rcs_internal_unlockfile (fout, rcs->path);
5251 
5252 	if ((flags & RCS_FLAGS_KEEPFILE) == 0)
5253 	{
5254 	    if (unlink_file (workfile) < 0)
5255 		/* FIXME-update-dir: message does not include update_dir.  */
5256 		error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", workfile);
5257 	}
5258 
5259 	status = 0;
5260 	goto checkin_done;
5261     }
5262 
5263     /* Derive a new revision number.  From the `ci' man page:
5264 
5265 	 "If rev  is  a revision number, it must be higher than the
5266 	 latest one on the branch to which  rev  belongs,  or  must
5267 	 start a new branch.
5268 
5269 	 If  rev is a branch rather than a revision number, the new
5270 	 revision is appended to that branch.  The level number  is
5271 	 obtained  by  incrementing the tip revision number of that
5272 	 branch.  If rev  indicates  a  non-existing  branch,  that
5273 	 branch  is  created  with  the  initial  revision numbered
5274 	 rev.1."
5275 
5276        RCS_findlock_or_tip handles the case where REV is omitted.
5277        RCS 5.7 also permits REV to be "$" or to begin with a dot, but
5278        we do not address those cases -- every routine that calls
5279        RCS_checkin passes it a numeric revision. */
5280 
5281     if (rev == NULL || *rev == '\0')
5282     {
5283 	/* Figure out where the commit point is by looking for locks.
5284 	   If the commit point is at the tip of a branch (or is the
5285 	   head of the delta tree), then increment its revision number
5286 	   to obtain the new revnum.  Otherwise, start a new
5287 	   branch. */
5288 	commitpt = RCS_findlock_or_tip (rcs);
5289 	if (commitpt == NULL)
5290 	{
5291 	    status = 1;
5292 	    goto checkin_done;
5293 	}
5294 	else if (commitpt->next == NULL
5295 		 || STREQ (commitpt->version, rcs->head))
5296 	    delta->version = increment_revnum (commitpt->version);
5297 	else
5298 	    delta->version = RCS_addbranch (rcs, commitpt->version);
5299     }
5300     else
5301     {
5302 	/* REV is either a revision number or a branch number.  Find the
5303 	   tip of the target branch. */
5304 	char *branch, *tip, *newrev, *p;
5305 	int dots, isrevnum;
5306 
5307 	assert (isdigit ((unsigned char) *rev));
5308 
5309 	newrev = xstrdup (rev);
5310 	dots = numdots (newrev);
5311 	isrevnum = dots & 1;
5312 
5313 	branch = xstrdup (rev);
5314 	if (isrevnum)
5315 	{
5316 	    p = strrchr (branch, '.');
5317 	    *p = '\0';
5318 	}
5319 
5320 	/* Find the tip of the target branch.  If we got a one- or two-digit
5321 	   revision number, this will be the head of the tree.  Exception:
5322 	   if rev is a single-field revision equal to the branch number of
5323 	   the trunk (usually "1") then we want to treat it like an ordinary
5324 	   branch revision. */
5325 	if (dots == 0)
5326 	{
5327 	    tip = xstrdup (rcs->head);
5328 	    if (atoi (tip) != atoi (branch))
5329 	    {
5330 		newrev = xrealloc (newrev, strlen (newrev) + 3);
5331 		strcat (newrev, ".1");
5332 		dots = isrevnum = 1;
5333 	    }
5334 	}
5335 	else if (dots == 1)
5336 	    tip = xstrdup (rcs->head);
5337 	else
5338 	    tip = RCS_getbranch (rcs, branch, 1);
5339 
5340 	/* If the branch does not exist, and we were supplied an exact
5341 	   revision number, signal an error.  Otherwise, if we were
5342 	   given only a branch number, create it and set COMMITPT to
5343 	   the branch point. */
5344 	if (tip == NULL)
5345 	{
5346 	    if (isrevnum)
5347 	    {
5348 		error (0, 0, "%s: can't find branch point %s",
5349 		       rcs->print_path, branch);
5350 		free (branch);
5351 		free (newrev);
5352 		status = 1;
5353 		goto checkin_done;
5354 	    }
5355 	    delta->version = RCS_addbranch (rcs, branch);
5356 	    if (!delta->version)
5357 	    {
5358 		free (branch);
5359 		free (newrev);
5360 		status = 1;
5361 		goto checkin_done;
5362 	    }
5363 	    adding_branch = 1;
5364 	    p = strrchr (branch, '.');
5365 	    *p = '\0';
5366 	    tip = xstrdup (branch);
5367 	}
5368 	else
5369 	{
5370 	    if (isrevnum)
5371 	    {
5372 		/* NEWREV must be higher than TIP. */
5373 		if (compare_revnums (tip, newrev) >= 0)
5374 		{
5375 		    error (0, 0,
5376 			   "%s: revision %s too low; must be higher than %s",
5377 			   rcs->print_path,
5378 			   newrev, tip);
5379 		    free (branch);
5380 		    free (newrev);
5381 		    free (tip);
5382 		    status = 1;
5383 		    goto checkin_done;
5384 		}
5385 		delta->version = xstrdup (newrev);
5386 	    }
5387 	    else
5388 		/* Just increment the tip number to get the new revision. */
5389 		delta->version = increment_revnum (tip);
5390 	}
5391 
5392 	nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, tip);
5393 	commitpt = nodep->data;
5394 
5395 	free (branch);
5396 	free (newrev);
5397 	free (tip);
5398     }
5399 
5400     assert (delta->version != NULL);
5401 
5402     /* If COMMITPT is locked by us, break the lock.  If it's locked
5403        by someone else, signal an error. */
5404     nodep = findnode (RCS_getlocks (rcs), commitpt->version);
5405     if (nodep != NULL)
5406     {
5407 	if (! STREQ (nodep->data, delta->author))
5408 	{
5409 	    /* If we are adding a branch, then leave the old lock around.
5410 	       That is sensible in the sense that when adding a branch,
5411 	       we don't need to use the lock to tell us where to check
5412 	       in.  It is fishy in the sense that if it is our own lock,
5413 	       we break it.  However, this is the RCS 5.7 behavior (at
5414 	       the end of addbranch in ci.c in RCS 5.7, it calls
5415 	       removelock only if it is our own lock, not someone
5416 	       else's).  */
5417 
5418 	    if (!adding_branch)
5419 	    {
5420 		error (0, 0, "%s: revision %s locked by %s",
5421 		       rcs->print_path,
5422 		       nodep->key, (char *)nodep->data);
5423 		status = 1;
5424 		goto checkin_done;
5425 	    }
5426 	}
5427 	else
5428 	    delnode (nodep);
5429     }
5430 
5431     dtext->version = xstrdup (delta->version);
5432 
5433     /* Obtain the change text for the new delta.  If DELTA is to be the
5434        new head of the tree, then its change text should be the contents
5435        of the working file, and LEAFNODE's change text should be a diff.
5436        Else, DELTA's change text should be a diff between LEAFNODE and
5437        the working file. */
5438 
5439     tmpfile = cvs_temp_name();
5440     status = RCS_checkout (rcs, NULL, commitpt->version, NULL,
5441 			   ((rcs->expand != NULL
5442 			     && STREQ (rcs->expand, "b"))
5443 			    ? "-kb"
5444 			    : "-ko"),
5445 			   tmpfile,
5446 			   NULL, NULL);
5447     if (status != 0)
5448 	error (1, 0,
5449 	       "could not check out revision %s of `%s'",
5450 	       commitpt->version, rcs->print_path);
5451 
5452     bufsize = 0;
5453     changefile = cvs_temp_name();
5454 
5455     /* Diff options should include --binary if the RCS file has -kb set
5456        in its `expand' field. */
5457     run_add_arg_p (&dargc, &darg_allocated, &dargv, "-a");
5458     run_add_arg_p (&dargc, &darg_allocated, &dargv, "-n");
5459     if (rcs->expand != NULL && STREQ (rcs->expand, "b"))
5460 	run_add_arg_p (&dargc, &darg_allocated, &dargv, "--binary");
5461 
5462     if (STREQ (commitpt->version, rcs->head) &&
5463 	numdots (delta->version) == 1)
5464     {
5465 	/* If this revision is being inserted on the trunk, the change text
5466 	   for the new delta should be the contents of the working file ... */
5467 	bufsize = 0;
5468 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
5469 	if (preserve_perms && !S_ISREG (sb.st_mode))
5470 	    /* Pretend file is empty.  */
5471 	    ;
5472 	else
5473 #endif
5474 	get_file (workfile, workfile,
5475 		  rcs->expand != NULL && STREQ (rcs->expand, "b") ? "rb" : "r",
5476 		  &dtext->text, &bufsize, &dtext->len);
5477 
5478 	/* ... and the change text for the old delta should be a diff. */
5479 	commitpt->text = xmalloc (sizeof (Deltatext));
5480 	memset (commitpt->text, 0, sizeof (Deltatext));
5481 
5482 	bufsize = 0;
5483 	switch (diff_exec (workfile, tmpfile, NULL, NULL,
5484 			   dargc, dargv, changefile))
5485 	{
5486 	    case 0:
5487 	    case 1:
5488 		break;
5489 	    case -1:
5490 		/* FIXME-update-dir: message does not include update_dir.  */
5491 		error (1, errno, "error diffing %s", workfile);
5492 		break;
5493 	    default:
5494 		/* FIXME-update-dir: message does not include update_dir.  */
5495 		error (1, 0, "error diffing %s", workfile);
5496 		break;
5497 	}
5498 
5499 	/* OK, the text file case here is really dumb.  Logically
5500 	   speaking we want diff to read the files in text mode,
5501 	   convert them to the canonical form found in RCS files
5502 	   (which, we hope at least, is independent of OS--always
5503 	   bare linefeeds), and then work with change texts in that
5504 	   format.  However, diff_exec both generates change
5505 	   texts and produces output for user purposes (e.g. patch.c),
5506 	   and there is no way to distinguish between the two cases.
5507 	   So we actually implement the text file case by writing the
5508 	   change text as a text file, then reading it as a text file.
5509 	   This should cause no harm, but doesn't strike me as
5510 	   immensely clean.  */
5511 	get_file (changefile, changefile,
5512 		  rcs->expand != NULL && STREQ (rcs->expand, "b") ? "rb" : "r",
5513 		  &commitpt->text->text, &bufsize, &commitpt->text->len);
5514 
5515 	/* If COMMITPT->TEXT->TEXT is NULL, it means that CHANGEFILE
5516 	   was empty and that there are no differences between revisions.
5517 	   In that event, we want to force RCS_rewrite to write an empty
5518 	   string for COMMITPT's change text.  Leaving the change text
5519 	   field set NULL won't work, since that means "preserve the original
5520 	   change text for this delta." */
5521 	if (commitpt->text->text == NULL)
5522 	{
5523 	    commitpt->text->text = xstrdup ("");
5524 	    commitpt->text->len = 0;
5525 	}
5526     }
5527     else
5528     {
5529 	/* This file is not being inserted at the head, but on a side
5530 	   branch somewhere.  Make a diff from the previous revision
5531 	   to the working file. */
5532 	switch (diff_exec (tmpfile, workfile, NULL, NULL,
5533 			   dargc, dargv, changefile))
5534 	{
5535 	    case 0:
5536 	    case 1:
5537 		break;
5538 	    case -1:
5539 		/* FIXME-update-dir: message does not include update_dir.  */
5540 		error (1, errno, "error diffing %s", workfile);
5541 		break;
5542 	    default:
5543 		/* FIXME-update-dir: message does not include update_dir.  */
5544 		error (1, 0, "error diffing %s", workfile);
5545 		break;
5546 	}
5547 	/* See the comment above, at the other get_file invocation,
5548 	   regarding binary vs. text.  */
5549 	get_file (changefile, changefile,
5550 		  rcs->expand != NULL && STREQ (rcs->expand, "b") ? "rb" : "r",
5551 		  &dtext->text, &bufsize,
5552 		  &dtext->len);
5553 	if (dtext->text == NULL)
5554 	{
5555 	    dtext->text = xstrdup ("");
5556 	    dtext->len = 0;
5557 	}
5558     }
5559 
5560     run_arg_free_p (dargc, dargv);
5561     free (dargv);
5562 
5563     /* Update DELTA linkage.  It is important not to do this before
5564        the very end of RCS_checkin; if an error arises that forces
5565        us to abort checking in, we must not have malformed deltas
5566        partially linked into the tree.
5567 
5568        If DELTA and COMMITPT are on different branches, do nothing --
5569        DELTA is linked to the tree through COMMITPT->BRANCHES, and we
5570        don't want to change `next' pointers.
5571 
5572        Otherwise, if the nodes are both on the trunk, link DELTA to
5573        COMMITPT; otherwise, link COMMITPT to DELTA. */
5574 
5575     if (numdots (commitpt->version) == numdots (delta->version))
5576     {
5577 	if (STREQ (commitpt->version, rcs->head))
5578 	{
5579 	    delta->next = rcs->head;
5580 	    rcs->head = xstrdup (delta->version);
5581 	}
5582 	else
5583 	    commitpt->next = xstrdup (delta->version);
5584     }
5585 
5586     /* Add DELTA to RCS->VERSIONS. */
5587     if (rcs->versions == NULL)
5588 	rcs->versions = getlist();
5589     nodep = getnode();
5590     nodep->type = RCSVERS;
5591     nodep->delproc = rcsvers_delproc;
5592     nodep->data = delta;
5593     nodep->key = delta->version;
5594     (void) addnode (rcs->versions, nodep);
5595 
5596     /* Write the new RCS file, inserting the new delta at COMMITPT. */
5597     if (!(checkin_quiet || really_quiet))
5598     {
5599 	cvs_output ("new revision: ", 14);
5600 	cvs_output (delta->version, 0);
5601 	cvs_output ("; previous revision: ", 21);
5602 	cvs_output (commitpt->version, 0);
5603 	cvs_output ("\n", 1);
5604     }
5605 
5606     RCS_rewrite (rcs, dtext, commitpt->version);
5607 
5608     if ((flags & RCS_FLAGS_KEEPFILE) == 0)
5609     {
5610 	if (unlink_file (workfile) < 0)
5611 	    /* FIXME-update-dir: message does not include update_dir.  */
5612 	    error (1, errno, "cannot remove %s", workfile);
5613     }
5614     if (unlink_file (tmpfile) < 0)
5615 	error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", tmpfile);
5616     free (tmpfile);
5617     if (unlink_file (changefile) < 0)
5618 	error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", changefile);
5619     free (changefile);
5620 
5621  checkin_done:
5622     free (workfile);
5623 
5624     if (commitpt != NULL && commitpt->text != NULL)
5625     {
5626 	freedeltatext (commitpt->text);
5627 	commitpt->text = NULL;
5628     }
5629 
5630     freedeltatext (dtext);
5631     if (status != 0)
5632     {
5633 	/* If delta has not been added to a List, then freeing the Node key
5634 	 * won't free delta->version.
5635 	 */
5636 	if (delta->version) free (delta->version);
5637 	free_rcsvers_contents (delta);
5638     }
5639 
5640     return status;
5641 }
5642 
5643 
5644 
5645 /* This structure is passed between RCS_cmp_file and cmp_file_buffer.  */
5646 struct cmp_file_data
5647 {
5648     const char *filename;
5649     FILE *fp;
5650     int different;
5651 };
5652 
5653 /* Compare the contents of revision REV1 of RCS file RCS with the
5654    contents of REV2 if given, otherwise, compare with the contents of
5655    the file FILENAME.  OPTIONS is a string for the keyword
5656    expansion options.  Return 0 if the contents of the revision are
5657    the same as the contents of the file, 1 if they are different.  */
5658 int
5659 RCS_cmp_file (RCSNode *rcs, const char *rev1, char **rev1_cache,
5660               const char *rev2, const char *options, const char *filename)
5661 {
5662     int binary;
5663 
5664     TRACE (TRACE_FUNCTION, "RCS_cmp_file( %s, %s, %s, %s, %s )",
5665            rcs->path ? rcs->path : "(null)",
5666 	   rev1 ? rev1 : "(null)", rev2 ? rev2 : "(null)",
5667 	   options ? options : "(null)", filename ? filename : "(null)");
5668 
5669     if (options != NULL && options[0] != '\0')
5670 	binary = STREQ (options, "-kb");
5671     else
5672     {
5673 	char *expand;
5674 
5675 	expand = RCS_getexpand (rcs);
5676 	if (expand != NULL && STREQ (expand, "b"))
5677 	    binary = 1;
5678 	else
5679 	    binary = 0;
5680     }
5681 
5682 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
5683     /* If CVS is to deal properly with special files (when
5684        PreservePermissions is on), the best way is to check out the
5685        revision to a temporary file and call `xcmp' on the two disk
5686        files.  xcmp needs to handle non-regular files properly anyway,
5687        so calling it simplifies RCS_cmp_file.  We *could* just yank
5688        the delta node out of the version tree and look for device
5689        numbers, but writing to disk and calling xcmp is a better
5690        abstraction (therefore probably more robust). -twp */
5691 
5692     if (preserve_perms)
5693     {
5694 	char *tmp;
5695 	int retcode;
5696 
5697 	tmp = cvs_temp_name();
5698 	retcode = RCS_checkout(rcs, NULL, rev, NULL, options, tmp, NULL, NULL);
5699 	if (retcode != 0)
5700 	    return 1;
5701 
5702 	retcode = xcmp (tmp, filename);
5703 	if (CVS_UNLINK (tmp) < 0)
5704 	    error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", tmp);
5705 	free (tmp);
5706 	return retcode;
5707     }
5708     else
5709 #endif
5710     {
5711 	FILE *fp;
5712 	struct cmp_file_data data;
5713 	const char *use_file1;
5714 	char *tmpfile = NULL;
5715 
5716 	if (rev2 != NULL)
5717 	{
5718 	    /* Open & cache rev1 */
5719 	    tmpfile = cvs_temp_name();
5720 	    if (RCS_checkout (rcs, NULL, rev1, NULL, options, tmpfile,
5721 	                      NULL, NULL))
5722 		error (1, errno,
5723 		       "cannot check out revision %s of %s",
5724 		       rev1, rcs->print_path);
5725 	    use_file1 = tmpfile;
5726 	    if (rev1_cache != NULL)
5727 		*rev1_cache = tmpfile;
5728 	}
5729 	else
5730 	    use_file1 = filename;
5731 
5732         fp = CVS_FOPEN (use_file1, binary ? FOPEN_BINARY_READ : "r");
5733 	if (fp == NULL)
5734 	    /* FIXME-update-dir: should include update_dir in message.  */
5735 	    error (1, errno, "cannot open file %s for comparing", use_file1);
5736 
5737         data.filename = use_file1;
5738         data.fp = fp;
5739         data.different = 0;
5740 
5741         if (RCS_checkout (rcs, NULL, rev2 ? rev2 : rev1, NULL, options,
5742                           RUN_TTY, cmp_file_buffer, &data ))
5743 		error (1, errno,
5744 		       "cannot check out revision %s of %s",
5745 		       rev2 ? rev2 : rev1, rcs->print_path);
5746 
5747         /* If we have not yet found a difference, make sure that we are at
5748            the end of the file.  */
5749         if (!data.different)
5750         {
5751 	    if (getc (fp) != EOF)
5752 		data.different = 1;
5753         }
5754 
5755         fclose (fp);
5756 	if (rev1_cache == NULL && tmpfile)
5757 	{
5758 	    if (CVS_UNLINK (tmpfile ) < 0)
5759 		error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", tmpfile);
5760 	    free (tmpfile);
5761 	}
5762 
5763         return data.different;
5764     }
5765 }
5766 
5767 
5768 
5769 /* This is a subroutine of RCS_cmp_file.  It is passed to
5770    RCS_checkout.  */
5771 #define CMP_BUF_SIZE (8 * 1024)
5772 
5773 static void
5774 cmp_file_buffer (void *callerdat, const char *buffer, size_t len)
5775 {
5776     struct cmp_file_data *data = callerdat;
5777     char *filebuf;
5778 
5779     /* If we've already found a difference, we don't need to check
5780        further.  */
5781     if (data->different)
5782 	return;
5783 
5784     filebuf = xmalloc (len > CMP_BUF_SIZE ? CMP_BUF_SIZE : len);
5785 
5786     while (len > 0)
5787     {
5788 	size_t checklen;
5789 
5790 	checklen = len > CMP_BUF_SIZE ? CMP_BUF_SIZE : len;
5791 	if (fread (filebuf, 1, checklen, data->fp) != checklen)
5792 	{
5793 	    if (ferror (data->fp))
5794 		error (1, errno, "cannot read file %s for comparing",
5795 		       data->filename);
5796 	    data->different = 1;
5797 	    free (filebuf);
5798 	    return;
5799 	}
5800 
5801 	if (memcmp (filebuf, buffer, checklen) != 0)
5802 	{
5803 	    data->different = 1;
5804 	    free (filebuf);
5805 	    return;
5806 	}
5807 
5808 	buffer += checklen;
5809 	len -= checklen;
5810     }
5811 
5812     free (filebuf);
5813 }
5814 
5815 
5816 
5817 /* For RCS file RCS, make symbolic tag TAG point to revision REV.
5818    This validates that TAG is OK for a user to use.  Return value is
5819    -1 for error (and errno is set to indicate the error), positive for
5820    error (and an error message has been printed), or zero for success.  */
5821 int
5822 RCS_settag (RCSNode *rcs, const char *tag, const char *rev)
5823 {
5824     List *symbols;
5825     Node *node;
5826 
5827     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
5828 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
5829 
5830     /* FIXME: This check should be moved to RCS_check_tag.  There is no
5831        reason for it to be here.  */
5832     if (STREQ (tag, TAG_BASE)
5833 	|| STREQ (tag, TAG_HEAD))
5834     {
5835 	/* Print the name of the tag might be considered redundant
5836 	   with the caller, which also prints it.  Perhaps this helps
5837 	   clarify why the tag name is considered reserved, I don't
5838 	   know.  */
5839 	error (0, 0, "Attempt to add reserved tag name %s", tag);
5840 	return 1;
5841     }
5842 
5843     /* A revision number of NULL means use the head or default branch.
5844        If rev is not NULL, it may be a symbolic tag or branch number;
5845        expand it to the correct numeric revision or branch head. */
5846     if (rev == NULL)
5847 	rev = rcs->branch ? rcs->branch : rcs->head;
5848 
5849     /* At this point rcs->symbol_data may not have been parsed.
5850        Calling RCS_symbols will force it to be parsed into a list
5851        which we can easily manipulate.  */
5852     symbols = RCS_symbols (rcs);
5853     if (symbols == NULL)
5854     {
5855 	symbols = getlist ();
5856 	rcs->symbols = symbols;
5857     }
5858     node = findnode (symbols, tag);
5859     if (node != NULL)
5860     {
5861 	free (node->data);
5862 	node->data = xstrdup (rev);
5863     }
5864     else
5865     {
5866 	node = getnode ();
5867 	node->key = xstrdup (tag);
5868 	node->data = xstrdup (rev);
5869 	(void)addnode_at_front (symbols, node);
5870     }
5871 
5872     return 0;
5873 }
5874 
5875 
5876 
5877 /* Delete the symbolic tag TAG from the RCS file RCS.  Return 0 if
5878    the tag was found (and removed), or 1 if it was not present.  (In
5879    either case, the tag will no longer be in RCS->SYMBOLS.) */
5880 int
5881 RCS_deltag (RCSNode *rcs, const char *tag)
5882 {
5883     List *symbols;
5884     Node *node;
5885     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
5886 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
5887 
5888     symbols = RCS_symbols (rcs);
5889     if (symbols == NULL)
5890 	return 1;
5891 
5892     node = findnode (symbols, tag);
5893     if (node == NULL)
5894 	return 1;
5895 
5896     delnode (node);
5897 
5898     return 0;
5899 }
5900 
5901 
5902 
5903 /* Set the default branch of RCS to REV.  */
5904 int
5905 RCS_setbranch (RCSNode *rcs, const char *rev)
5906 {
5907     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
5908 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
5909 
5910     if (rev && ! *rev)
5911 	rev = NULL;
5912 
5913     if (rev == NULL && rcs->branch == NULL)
5914 	return 0;
5915     if (rev != NULL && rcs->branch != NULL && STREQ (rev, rcs->branch))
5916 	return 0;
5917 
5918     if (rcs->branch != NULL)
5919 	free (rcs->branch);
5920     rcs->branch = xstrdup (rev);
5921 
5922     return 0;
5923 }
5924 
5925 
5926 
5927 /* Lock revision REV.  LOCK_QUIET is 1 to suppress output.  FIXME:
5928    Most of the callers only call us because RCS_checkin still tends to
5929    like a lock (a relic of old behavior inherited from the RCS ci
5930    program).  If we clean this up, only "cvs admin -l" will still need
5931    to call RCS_lock.  */
5932 
5933 /* FIXME-twp: if a lock owned by someone else is broken, should this
5934    send mail to the lock owner?  Prompt user?  It seems like such an
5935    obscure situation for CVS as almost not worth worrying much
5936    about. */
5937 int
5938 RCS_lock (RCSNode *rcs, const char *rev, int lock_quiet)
5939 {
5940     List *locks;
5941     Node *p;
5942     char *user;
5943     char *xrev = NULL;
5944 
5945     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
5946 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
5947 
5948     locks = RCS_getlocks (rcs);
5949     if (locks == NULL)
5950 	locks = rcs->locks = getlist();
5951     user = getcaller();
5952 
5953     /* A revision number of NULL means lock the head or default branch. */
5954     if (rev == NULL)
5955 	xrev = RCS_head (rcs);
5956     else
5957 	xrev = RCS_gettag (rcs, rev, 1, NULL);
5958 
5959     /* Make sure that the desired revision exists.  Technically,
5960        we can update the locks list without even checking this,
5961        but RCS 5.7 did this.  And it can't hurt. */
5962     if (xrev == NULL || findnode (rcs->versions, xrev) == NULL)
5963     {
5964 	if (!lock_quiet)
5965 	    error (0, 0, "%s: revision %s absent", rcs->print_path, rev);
5966 	free (xrev);
5967 	return 1;
5968     }
5969 
5970     /* Is this rev already locked? */
5971     p = findnode (locks, xrev);
5972     if (p != NULL)
5973     {
5974 	if (STREQ (p->data, user))
5975 	{
5976 	    /* We already own the lock on this revision, so do nothing. */
5977 	    free (xrev);
5978 	    return 0;
5979 	}
5980 
5981 #if 0
5982 	/* Well, first of all, "rev" below should be "xrev" to avoid
5983 	   core dumps.  But more importantly, should we really be
5984 	   breaking the lock unconditionally?  What CVS 1.9 does (via
5985 	   RCS) is to prompt "Revision 1.1 is already locked by fred.
5986 	   Do you want to break the lock? [ny](n): ".  Well, we don't
5987 	   want to interact with the user (certainly not at the
5988 	   server/protocol level, and probably not in the command-line
5989 	   client), but isn't it more sensible to give an error and
5990 	   let the user run "cvs admin -u" if they want to break the
5991 	   lock?  */
5992 
5993 	/* Break the lock. */
5994 	if (!lock_quiet)
5995 	{
5996 	    cvs_output (rev, 0);
5997 	    cvs_output (" unlocked\n", 0);
5998 	}
5999 	delnode (p);
6000 #else
6001 	error (1, 0, "Revision %s is already locked by %s",
6002                xrev, (char *)p->data);
6003 #endif
6004     }
6005 
6006     /* Create a new lock. */
6007     p = getnode();
6008     p->key = xrev;	/* already xstrdupped */
6009     p->data = xstrdup (getcaller());
6010     (void)addnode_at_front (locks, p);
6011 
6012     if (!lock_quiet)
6013     {
6014 	cvs_output (xrev, 0);
6015 	cvs_output (" locked\n", 0);
6016     }
6017 
6018     return 0;
6019 }
6020 
6021 
6022 
6023 /* Unlock revision REV.  UNLOCK_QUIET is 1 to suppress output.  FIXME:
6024    Like RCS_lock, this can become a no-op if we do the checkin
6025    ourselves.
6026 
6027    If REV is not null and is locked by someone else, break their
6028    lock and notify them.  It is an open issue whether RCS_unlock
6029    queries the user about whether or not to break the lock. */
6030 int
6031 RCS_unlock (RCSNode *rcs, char *rev, int unlock_quiet)
6032 {
6033     Node *lock;
6034     List *locks;
6035     char *user;
6036     char *xrev = NULL;
6037 
6038     user = getcaller();
6039     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
6040 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
6041 
6042     /* If rev is NULL, unlock the revision held by the caller; if more
6043        than one, make the user specify the revision explicitly.  This
6044        differs from RCS which unlocks the latest revision (first in
6045        rcs->locks) held by the caller. */
6046     if (rev == NULL)
6047     {
6048 	Node *p;
6049 
6050 	/* No-ops: attempts to unlock an empty tree or an unlocked file. */
6051 	if (rcs->head == NULL)
6052 	{
6053 	    if (!unlock_quiet)
6054 		cvs_outerr ("can't unlock an empty tree\n", 0);
6055 	    return 0;
6056 	}
6057 
6058 	locks = RCS_getlocks (rcs);
6059 	if (locks == NULL)
6060 	{
6061 	    if (!unlock_quiet)
6062 		cvs_outerr ("No locks are set.\n", 0);
6063 	    return 0;
6064 	}
6065 
6066 	lock = NULL;
6067 	for (p = locks->list->next; p != locks->list; p = p->next)
6068 	{
6069 	    if (STREQ (p->data, user))
6070 	    {
6071 		if (lock != NULL)
6072 		{
6073 		    if (!unlock_quiet)
6074 			error (0, 0, "\
6075 %s: multiple revisions locked by %s; please specify one", rcs->print_path, user);
6076 		    return 1;
6077 		}
6078 		lock = p;
6079 	    }
6080 	}
6081 	if (lock == NULL)
6082 	{
6083 	    if (!unlock_quiet)
6084 		error (0, 0, "No locks are set for %s.\n", user);
6085 	    return 0;	/* no lock found, ergo nothing to do */
6086 	}
6087 	xrev = xstrdup (lock->key);
6088     }
6089     else
6090     {
6091 	xrev = RCS_gettag (rcs, rev, 1, NULL);
6092 	if (xrev == NULL)
6093 	{
6094 	    error (0, 0, "%s: revision %s absent", rcs->print_path, rev);
6095 	    return 1;
6096 	}
6097     }
6098 
6099     lock = findnode (RCS_getlocks (rcs), xrev);
6100     if (lock == NULL)
6101     {
6102 	/* This revision isn't locked. */
6103 	free (xrev);
6104 	return 0;
6105     }
6106 
6107     if (! STREQ (lock->data, user))
6108     {
6109         /* If the revision is locked by someone else, notify
6110 	   them.  Note that this shouldn't ever happen if RCS_unlock
6111 	   is called with a NULL revision, since that means "whatever
6112 	   revision is currently locked by the caller." */
6113 	char *repos, *workfile;
6114 	if (!unlock_quiet)
6115 	    error (0, 0, "\
6116 %s: revision %s locked by %s; breaking lock", rcs->print_path, xrev,
6117 		   (char *)lock->data);
6118 	repos = xstrdup (rcs->path);
6119 	workfile = strrchr (repos, '/');
6120 	*workfile++ = '\0';
6121 	notify_do ('C', workfile, NULL, user, NULL, NULL, repos);
6122 	free (repos);
6123     }
6124 
6125     delnode (lock);
6126     if (!unlock_quiet)
6127     {
6128 	cvs_output (xrev, 0);
6129 	cvs_output (" unlocked\n", 0);
6130     }
6131 
6132     free (xrev);
6133     return 0;
6134 }
6135 
6136 
6137 
6138 /* Add USER to the access list of RCS.  Do nothing if already present.
6139    FIXME-twp: check syntax of USER to make sure it's a valid id. */
6140 
6141 void
6142 RCS_addaccess (RCSNode *rcs, char *user)
6143 {
6144     char *access, *a;
6145 
6146     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
6147 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
6148 
6149     if (rcs->access == NULL)
6150 	rcs->access = xstrdup (user);
6151     else
6152     {
6153 	access = xstrdup (rcs->access);
6154 	for (a = strtok (access, " "); a != NULL; a = strtok (NULL, " "))
6155 	{
6156 	    if (STREQ (a, user))
6157 	    {
6158 		free (access);
6159 		return;
6160 	    }
6161 	}
6162 	free (access);
6163 	rcs->access = xrealloc (rcs->access,
6164 				strlen (rcs->access) + strlen (user) + 2);
6165 	strcat (rcs->access, " ");
6166 	strcat (rcs->access, user);
6167     }
6168 }
6169 
6170 
6171 
6172 /* Remove USER from the access list of RCS. */
6173 void
6174 RCS_delaccess (RCSNode *rcs, char *user)
6175 {
6176     char *p, *s;
6177     int ulen;
6178 
6179     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
6180 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
6181 
6182     if (rcs->access == NULL)
6183 	return;
6184 
6185     if (user == NULL)
6186     {
6187         free (rcs->access);
6188         rcs->access = NULL;
6189         return;
6190     }
6191 
6192     p = rcs->access;
6193     ulen = strlen (user);
6194     while (p != NULL)
6195     {
6196 	if (strncmp (p, user, ulen) == 0 && (p[ulen] == '\0' || p[ulen] == ' '))
6197 	    break;
6198 	p = strchr (p, ' ');
6199 	if (p != NULL)
6200 	    ++p;
6201     }
6202 
6203     if (p == NULL)
6204 	return;
6205 
6206     s = p + ulen;
6207     while (*s != '\0')
6208 	*p++ = *s++;
6209     *p = '\0';
6210 }
6211 
6212 
6213 
6214 char *
6215 RCS_getaccess (RCSNode *rcs)
6216 {
6217     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
6218 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
6219 
6220     return rcs->access;
6221 }
6222 
6223 
6224 
6225 /* Return a nonzero value if the revision specified by ARG is found.  */
6226 static int
6227 findtag (Node *node, void *arg)
6228 {
6229     char *rev = arg;
6230 
6231     if (STREQ (node->data, rev))
6232 	return 1;
6233     else
6234 	return 0;
6235 }
6236 
6237 
6238 
6239 /* Delete revisions between REV1 and REV2.  The changes between the two
6240    revisions must be collapsed, and the result stored in the revision
6241    immediately preceding the lower one.  Return 0 for successful completion,
6242    1 otherwise.
6243 
6244    Solution: check out the revision preceding REV1 and the revision
6245    following REV2.  Use call_diff to find aggregate diffs between
6246    these two revisions, and replace the delta text for the latter one
6247    with the new aggregate diff.  Alternatively, we could write a
6248    function that takes two change texts and combines them to produce a
6249    new change text, without checking out any revs or calling diff.  It
6250    would be hairy, but so, so cool.
6251 
6252    If INCLUSIVE is set, then TAG1 and TAG2, if non-NULL, tell us to
6253    delete that revision as well (cvs admin -o tag1:tag2).  If clear,
6254    delete up to but not including that revision (cvs admin -o tag1::tag2).
6255    This does not affect TAG1 or TAG2 being NULL; the meaning of the start
6256    point in ::tag2 and :tag2 is the same and likewise for end points.  */
6257 int
6258 RCS_delete_revs (RCSNode *rcs, char *tag1, char *tag2, int inclusive)
6259 {
6260     char *next;
6261     Node *nodep;
6262     RCSVers *revp = NULL;
6263     RCSVers *beforep;
6264     int status, found;
6265     int save_noexec;
6266 
6267     char *branchpoint = NULL;
6268     char *rev1 = NULL;
6269     char *rev2 = NULL;
6270     int rev1_inclusive = inclusive;
6271     int rev2_inclusive = inclusive;
6272     char *before = NULL;
6273     char *after = NULL;
6274     char *beforefile = NULL;
6275     char *afterfile = NULL;
6276     char *outfile = NULL;
6277 
6278     if (tag1 == NULL && tag2 == NULL)
6279 	return 0;
6280 
6281     /* Assume error status until everything is finished. */
6282     status = 1;
6283 
6284     /* Make sure both revisions exist. */
6285     if (tag1 != NULL)
6286     {
6287 	rev1 = RCS_gettag (rcs, tag1, 1, NULL);
6288 	if (rev1 == NULL || (nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, rev1)) == NULL)
6289 	{
6290 	    error (0, 0, "%s: Revision %s doesn't exist.", rcs->print_path, tag1);
6291 	    goto delrev_done;
6292 	}
6293     }
6294     if (tag2 != NULL)
6295     {
6296 	rev2 = RCS_gettag (rcs, tag2, 1, NULL);
6297 	if (rev2 == NULL || (nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, rev2)) == NULL)
6298 	{
6299 	    error (0, 0, "%s: Revision %s doesn't exist.", rcs->print_path, tag2);
6300 	    goto delrev_done;
6301 	}
6302     }
6303 
6304     /* If rev1 is on the trunk and rev2 is NULL, rev2 should be
6305        RCS->HEAD.  (*Not* RCS_head(rcs), which may return rcs->branch
6306        instead.)  We need to check this special case early, in order
6307        to make sure that rev1 and rev2 get ordered correctly. */
6308     if (rev2 == NULL && numdots (rev1) == 1)
6309     {
6310 	rev2 = xstrdup (rcs->head);
6311 	rev2_inclusive = 1;
6312     }
6313 
6314     if (rev2 == NULL)
6315 	rev2_inclusive = 1;
6316 
6317     if (rev1 != NULL && rev2 != NULL)
6318     {
6319 	/* A range consisting of a branch number means the latest revision
6320 	   on that branch. */
6321 	if (RCS_isbranch (rcs, rev1) && STREQ (rev1, rev2))
6322 	{
6323 	    char *tmp = RCS_getbranch (rcs, rev1, 0);
6324 	    free (rev1);
6325 	    free (rev2);
6326 	    rev1 = rev2 = tmp;
6327 	}
6328 	else
6329 	{
6330 	    /* Make sure REV1 and REV2 are ordered correctly (in the
6331 	       same order as the next field).  For revisions on the
6332 	       trunk, REV1 should be higher than REV2; for branches,
6333 	       REV1 should be lower.  */
6334 	    /* Shouldn't we just be giving an error in the case where
6335 	       the user specifies the revisions in the wrong order
6336 	       (that is, always swap on the trunk, never swap on a
6337 	       branch, in the non-error cases)?  It is not at all
6338 	       clear to me that users who specify -o 1.4:1.2 really
6339 	       meant to type -o 1.2:1.4, and the out of order usage
6340 	       has never been documented, either by cvs.texinfo or
6341 	       rcs(1).  */
6342 	    char *temp;
6343 	    int temp_inclusive;
6344 	    if (numdots (rev1) == 1)
6345 	    {
6346 		if (compare_revnums (rev1, rev2) <= 0)
6347 		{
6348 		    temp = rev2;
6349 		    rev2 = rev1;
6350 		    rev1 = temp;
6351 
6352 		    temp_inclusive = rev2_inclusive;
6353 		    rev2_inclusive = rev1_inclusive;
6354 		    rev1_inclusive = temp_inclusive;
6355 		}
6356 	    }
6357 	    else if (compare_revnums (rev1, rev2) > 0)
6358 	    {
6359 		temp = rev2;
6360 		rev2 = rev1;
6361 		rev1 = temp;
6362 
6363 		temp_inclusive = rev2_inclusive;
6364 		rev2_inclusive = rev1_inclusive;
6365 		rev1_inclusive = temp_inclusive;
6366 	    }
6367 	}
6368     }
6369 
6370     /* Basically the same thing; make sure that the ordering is what we
6371        need.  */
6372     if (rev1 == NULL)
6373     {
6374 	assert (rev2 != NULL);
6375 	if (numdots (rev2) == 1)
6376 	{
6377 	    /* Swap rev1 and rev2.  */
6378 	    int temp_inclusive;
6379 
6380 	    rev1 = rev2;
6381 	    rev2 = NULL;
6382 
6383 	    temp_inclusive = rev2_inclusive;
6384 	    rev2_inclusive = rev1_inclusive;
6385 	    rev1_inclusive = temp_inclusive;
6386 	}
6387     }
6388 
6389     /* Put the revision number preceding the first one to delete into
6390        BEFORE (where "preceding" means according to the next field).
6391        If the first revision to delete is the first revision on its
6392        branch (e.g. 1.3.2.1), BEFORE should be the node on the trunk
6393        at which the branch is rooted.  If the first revision to delete
6394        is the head revision of the trunk, set BEFORE to NULL.
6395 
6396        Note that because BEFORE may not be on the same branch as REV1,
6397        it is not very handy for navigating the revision tree.  It's
6398        most useful just for checking out the revision preceding REV1. */
6399     before = NULL;
6400     branchpoint = RCS_getbranchpoint (rcs, rev1 != NULL ? rev1 : rev2);
6401     if (rev1 == NULL)
6402     {
6403 	rev1 = xstrdup (branchpoint);
6404 	if (numdots (branchpoint) > 1)
6405 	{
6406 	    char *bp;
6407 	    bp = strrchr (branchpoint, '.');
6408 	    while (*--bp != '.')
6409 		;
6410 	    *bp = '\0';
6411 	    /* Note that this is exclusive, always, because the inclusive
6412 	       flag doesn't affect the meaning when rev1 == NULL.  */
6413 	    before = xstrdup (branchpoint);
6414 	    *bp = '.';
6415 	}
6416     }
6417     else if (! STREQ (rev1, branchpoint))
6418     {
6419 	/* Walk deltas from BRANCHPOINT on, looking for REV1. */
6420 	nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, branchpoint);
6421 	revp = nodep->data;
6422 	while (revp->next != NULL && ! STREQ (revp->next, rev1))
6423 	{
6424 	    revp = nodep->data;
6425 	    nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, revp->next);
6426 	}
6427 	if (revp->next == NULL)
6428 	{
6429 	    error (0, 0, "%s: Revision %s doesn't exist.", rcs->print_path, rev1);
6430 	    goto delrev_done;
6431 	}
6432 	if (rev1_inclusive)
6433 	    before = xstrdup (revp->version);
6434 	else
6435 	{
6436 	    before = rev1;
6437 	    nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, before);
6438 	    rev1 = xstrdup (((RCSVers *)nodep->data)->next);
6439 	}
6440     }
6441     else if (!rev1_inclusive)
6442     {
6443 	before = rev1;
6444 	nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, before);
6445 	rev1 = xstrdup (((RCSVers *)nodep->data)->next);
6446     }
6447     else if (numdots (branchpoint) > 1)
6448     {
6449 	/* Example: rev1 is "1.3.2.1", branchpoint is "1.3.2.1".
6450 	   Set before to "1.3".  */
6451 	char *bp;
6452 	bp = strrchr (branchpoint, '.');
6453 	while (*--bp != '.')
6454 	    ;
6455 	*bp = '\0';
6456 	before = xstrdup (branchpoint);
6457 	*bp = '.';
6458     }
6459 
6460     /* If any revision between REV1 and REV2 is locked or is a branch point,
6461        we can't delete that revision and must abort. */
6462     after = NULL;
6463     next = rev1;
6464     found = 0;
6465     while (!found && next != NULL)
6466     {
6467 	nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, next);
6468 	revp = nodep->data;
6469 
6470 	if (rev2 != NULL)
6471 	    found = STREQ (revp->version, rev2);
6472 	next = revp->next;
6473 
6474 	if ((!found && next != NULL) || rev2_inclusive || rev2 == NULL)
6475 	{
6476 	    if (findnode (RCS_getlocks (rcs), revp->version))
6477 	    {
6478 		error (0, 0, "%s: can't remove locked revision %s",
6479 		       rcs->print_path,
6480 		       revp->version);
6481 		goto delrev_done;
6482 	    }
6483 	    if (revp->branches != NULL)
6484 	    {
6485 		error (0, 0, "%s: can't remove branch point %s",
6486 		       rcs->print_path,
6487 		       revp->version);
6488 		goto delrev_done;
6489 	    }
6490 
6491 	    /* Doing this only for the :: syntax is for compatibility.
6492 	       See cvs.texinfo for somewhat more discussion.  */
6493 	    if (!inclusive
6494 		&& walklist (RCS_symbols (rcs), findtag, revp->version))
6495 	    {
6496 		/* We don't print which file this happens to on the theory
6497 		   that the caller will print the name of the file in a
6498 		   more useful fashion (fullname not rcs->path).  */
6499 		error (0, 0, "cannot remove revision %s because it has tags",
6500 		       revp->version);
6501 		goto delrev_done;
6502 	    }
6503 
6504 	    /* It's misleading to print the `deleting revision' output
6505 	       here, since we may not actually delete these revisions.
6506 	       But that's how RCS does it.  Bleah.  Someday this should be
6507 	       moved to the point where the revs are actually marked for
6508 	       deletion. -twp */
6509 	    cvs_output ("deleting revision ", 0);
6510 	    cvs_output (revp->version, 0);
6511 	    cvs_output ("\n", 1);
6512 	}
6513     }
6514 
6515     if (rev2 == NULL)
6516 	;
6517     else if (found)
6518     {
6519 	if (rev2_inclusive)
6520 	    after = xstrdup (next);
6521 	else
6522 	    after = xstrdup (revp->version);
6523     }
6524     else if (!inclusive)
6525     {
6526 	/* In the case of an empty range, for example 1.2::1.2 or
6527 	   1.2::1.3, we want to just do nothing.  */
6528 	status = 0;
6529 	goto delrev_done;
6530     }
6531     else
6532     {
6533 	/* This looks fishy in the cases where tag1 == NULL or tag2 == NULL.
6534 	   Are those cases really impossible?  */
6535 	assert (tag1 != NULL);
6536 	assert (tag2 != NULL);
6537 
6538 	error (0, 0, "%s: invalid revision range %s:%s", rcs->print_path,
6539 	       tag1, tag2);
6540 	goto delrev_done;
6541     }
6542 
6543     if (after == NULL && before == NULL)
6544     {
6545 	/* The user is trying to delete all revisions.  While an
6546 	   RCS file without revisions makes sense to RCS (e.g. the
6547 	   state after "rcs -i"), CVS has never been able to cope with
6548 	   it.  So at least for now we just make this an error.
6549 
6550 	   We don't include rcs->path in the message since "cvs admin"
6551 	   already printed "RCS file:" and the name.  */
6552 	error (1, 0, "attempt to delete all revisions");
6553     }
6554 
6555     /* The conditionals at this point get really hairy.  Here is the
6556        general idea:
6557 
6558        IF before != NULL and after == NULL
6559          THEN don't check out any revisions, just delete them
6560        IF before == NULL and after != NULL
6561          THEN only check out after's revision, and use it for the new deltatext
6562        ELSE
6563          check out both revisions and diff -n them.  This could use
6564 	 RCS_exec_rcsdiff with some changes, like being able
6565 	 to suppress diagnostic messages and to direct output. */
6566 
6567     if (after != NULL)
6568     {
6569 	char *diffbuf;
6570 	size_t bufsize, len;
6571 
6572 #if defined (WOE32) && !defined (__CYGWIN32__)
6573 	/* FIXME: This is an awful kludge, but at least until I have
6574 	   time to work on it a little more and test it, I'd rather
6575 	   give a fatal error than corrupt the file.  I think that we
6576 	   need to use "-kb" and "--binary" and "rb" to get_file
6577 	   (probably can do it always, not just for binary files, if
6578 	   we are consistent between the RCS_checkout and the diff).  */
6579 	{
6580 	    char *expand = RCS_getexpand (rcs);
6581 	    if (expand != NULL && STREQ (expand, "b"))
6582 		error (1, 0,
6583 		   "admin -o not implemented yet for binary on this system");
6584 	}
6585 #endif /* WOE32 */
6586 
6587 	afterfile = cvs_temp_name();
6588 	status = RCS_checkout (rcs, NULL, after, NULL, "-ko", afterfile,
6589 			       NULL, NULL);
6590 	if (status > 0)
6591 	    goto delrev_done;
6592 
6593 	if (before == NULL)
6594 	{
6595 	    /* We are deleting revisions from the head of the tree,
6596 	       so must create a new head. */
6597 	    diffbuf = NULL;
6598 	    bufsize = 0;
6599 	    get_file (afterfile, afterfile, "r", &diffbuf, &bufsize, &len);
6600 
6601 	    save_noexec = noexec;
6602 	    noexec = 0;
6603 	    if (unlink_file (afterfile) < 0)
6604 		error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", afterfile);
6605 	    noexec = save_noexec;
6606 
6607 	    free (afterfile);
6608 	    afterfile = NULL;
6609 
6610 	    free (rcs->head);
6611 	    rcs->head = xstrdup (after);
6612 	}
6613 	else
6614 	{
6615 	    int dargc = 0;
6616 	    size_t darg_allocated = 0;
6617 	    char **dargv = NULL;
6618 
6619 	    beforefile = cvs_temp_name();
6620 	    status = RCS_checkout (rcs, NULL, before, NULL, "-ko", beforefile,
6621 				   NULL, NULL);
6622 	    if (status > 0)
6623 		goto delrev_done;
6624 
6625 	    outfile = cvs_temp_name();
6626 	    run_add_arg_p (&dargc, &darg_allocated, &dargv, "-a");
6627 	    run_add_arg_p (&dargc, &darg_allocated, &dargv, "-n");
6628 	    status = diff_exec (beforefile, afterfile, NULL, NULL,
6629 				dargc, dargv, outfile);
6630 	    run_arg_free_p (dargc, dargv);
6631 	    free (dargv);
6632 
6633 	    if (status == 2)
6634 	    {
6635 		/* Not sure we need this message; will diff_exec already
6636 		   have printed an error?  */
6637 		error (0, 0, "%s: could not diff", rcs->print_path);
6638 		status = 1;
6639 		goto delrev_done;
6640 	    }
6641 
6642 	    diffbuf = NULL;
6643 	    bufsize = 0;
6644 	    get_file (outfile, outfile, "r", &diffbuf, &bufsize, &len);
6645 	}
6646 
6647 	/* Save the new change text in after's delta node. */
6648 	nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, after);
6649 	revp = nodep->data;
6650 
6651 	assert (revp->text == NULL);
6652 
6653 	revp->text = xmalloc (sizeof (Deltatext));
6654 	memset (revp->text, 0, sizeof (Deltatext));
6655 	revp->text->version = xstrdup (revp->version);
6656 	revp->text->text = diffbuf;
6657 	revp->text->len = len;
6658 
6659 	/* If DIFFBUF is NULL, it means that OUTFILE is empty and that
6660 	   there are no differences between the two revisions.  In that
6661 	   case, we want to force RCS_copydeltas to write an empty string
6662 	   for the new change text (leaving the text field set NULL
6663 	   means "preserve the original change text for this delta," so
6664 	   we don't want that). */
6665 	if (revp->text->text == NULL)
6666 	    revp->text->text = xstrdup ("");
6667     }
6668 
6669     /* Walk through the revisions (again) to mark each one as
6670        outdated.  (FIXME: would it be safe to use the `dead' field for
6671        this?  Doubtful.) */
6672     for (next = rev1;
6673 	 next != NULL && (after == NULL || ! STREQ (next, after));
6674 	 next = revp->next)
6675     {
6676 	nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, next);
6677 	revp = nodep->data;
6678 	revp->outdated = 1;
6679     }
6680 
6681     /* Update delta links.  If BEFORE == NULL, we're changing the
6682        head of the tree and don't need to update any `next' links. */
6683     if (before != NULL)
6684     {
6685 	/* If REV1 is the first node on its branch, then BEFORE is its
6686 	   root node (on the trunk) and we have to update its branches
6687 	   list.  Otherwise, BEFORE is on the same branch as AFTER, and
6688 	   we can just change BEFORE's `next' field to point to AFTER.
6689 	   (This should be safe: since findnode manages its lists via
6690 	   the `hashnext' and `hashprev' fields, rather than `next' and
6691 	   `prev', mucking with `next' and `prev' should not corrupt the
6692 	   delta tree's internal structure.  Much. -twp) */
6693 
6694 	if (rev1 == NULL)
6695 	    /* beforep's ->next field already should be equal to after,
6696 	       which I think is always NULL in this case.  */
6697 	    ;
6698 	else if (STREQ (rev1, branchpoint))
6699 	{
6700 	    nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, before);
6701 	    revp = nodep->data;
6702 	    nodep = revp->branches->list->next;
6703 	    while (nodep != revp->branches->list &&
6704 		   ! STREQ (nodep->key, rev1))
6705 		nodep = nodep->next;
6706 	    assert (nodep != revp->branches->list);
6707 	    if (after == NULL)
6708 		delnode (nodep);
6709 	    else
6710 	    {
6711 		free (nodep->key);
6712 		nodep->key = xstrdup (after);
6713 	    }
6714 	}
6715 	else
6716 	{
6717 	    nodep = findnode (rcs->versions, before);
6718 	    beforep = nodep->data;
6719 	    free (beforep->next);
6720 	    beforep->next = xstrdup (after);
6721 	}
6722     }
6723 
6724     status = 0;
6725 
6726  delrev_done:
6727     if (rev1 != NULL)
6728 	free (rev1);
6729     if (rev2 && rev2 != rev1)
6730 	free (rev2);
6731     if (branchpoint != NULL)
6732 	free (branchpoint);
6733     if (before != NULL)
6734 	free (before);
6735     if (after != NULL)
6736 	free (after);
6737 
6738     save_noexec = noexec;
6739     noexec = 0;
6740     if (beforefile != NULL)
6741     {
6742 	if (unlink_file (beforefile) < 0)
6743 	    error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", beforefile);
6744 	free (beforefile);
6745     }
6746     if (afterfile != NULL)
6747     {
6748 	if (unlink_file (afterfile) < 0)
6749 	    error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", afterfile);
6750 	free (afterfile);
6751     }
6752     if (outfile != NULL)
6753     {
6754 	if (unlink_file (outfile) < 0)
6755 	    error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", outfile);
6756 	free (outfile);
6757     }
6758     noexec = save_noexec;
6759 
6760     return status;
6761 }
6762 
6763 
6764 
6765 /*
6766  * TRUE if there exists a symbolic tag "tag" in file.
6767  */
6768 int
6769 RCS_exist_tag (RCSNode *rcs, char *tag)
6770 {
6771 
6772     assert (rcs != NULL);
6773 
6774     if (findnode (RCS_symbols (rcs), tag))
6775     return 1;
6776     return 0;
6777 
6778 }
6779 
6780 
6781 
6782 /*
6783  * TRUE if RCS revision number "rev" exists.
6784  * This includes magic branch revisions, not found in rcs->versions,
6785  * but only in rcs->symbols, requiring a list walk to find them.
6786  * Take advantage of list walk callback function already used by
6787  * RCS_delete_revs, above.
6788  */
6789 int
6790 RCS_exist_rev (RCSNode *rcs, char *rev)
6791 {
6792 
6793     assert (rcs != NULL);
6794 
6795     if (rcs->flags & PARTIAL)
6796 	RCS_reparsercsfile (rcs, NULL, NULL);
6797 
6798     if (findnode(rcs->versions, rev) != 0)
6799 	return 1;
6800 
6801     if (walklist (RCS_symbols(rcs), findtag, rev) != 0)
6802 	return 1;
6803 
6804     return 0;
6805 
6806 }
6807 
6808 
6809 
6810 
6811 /* RCS_deltas and friends.  Processing of the deltas in RCS files.  */
6812 struct line
6813 {
6814     /* Text of this line.  Part of the same malloc'd block as the struct
6815        line itself (we probably should use the "struct hack" (char text[1])
6816        and save ourselves sizeof (char *) bytes).  Does not include \n;
6817        instead has_newline indicates the presence or absence of \n.  */
6818     char *text;
6819     /* Length of this line, not counting \n if has_newline is true.  */
6820     size_t len;
6821     /* Version in which it was introduced.  */
6822     RCSVers *vers;
6823     /* Nonzero if this line ends with \n.  This will always be true
6824        except possibly for the last line.  */
6825     int has_newline;
6826     /* Number of pointers to this struct line.  */
6827     int refcount;
6828 };
6829 
6830 struct linevector
6831 {
6832     /* How many lines in use for this linevector?  */
6833     unsigned int nlines;
6834     /* How many lines allocated for this linevector?  */
6835     unsigned int lines_alloced;
6836     /* Pointer to array containing a pointer to each line.  */
6837     struct line **vector;
6838 };
6839 
6840 
6841 
6842 /* Initialize *VEC to be a linevector with no lines.  */
6843 static void
6844 linevector_init (struct linevector *vec)
6845 {
6846     vec->lines_alloced = 0;
6847     vec->nlines = 0;
6848     vec->vector = NULL;
6849 }
6850 
6851 
6852 
6853 /* Given some text TEXT, add each of its lines to VEC before line POS
6854    (where line 0 is the first line).  The last line in TEXT may or may
6855    not be \n terminated.
6856    Set the version for each of the new lines to VERS.  This
6857    function returns non-zero for success.  It returns zero if the line
6858    number is out of range.
6859 
6860    Each of the lines in TEXT are copied to space which is managed with
6861    the linevector (and freed by linevector_free).  So the caller doesn't
6862    need to keep TEXT around after the call to this function.  */
6863 static int
6864 linevector_add (struct linevector *vec, const char *text, size_t len,
6865 		RCSVers *vers, unsigned int pos)
6866 {
6867     const char *textend;
6868     unsigned int i;
6869     unsigned int nnew;
6870     const char *p;
6871     const char *nextline_text;
6872     size_t nextline_len;
6873     int nextline_newline;
6874     struct line *q;
6875 
6876     if (len == 0)
6877 	return 1;
6878 
6879     textend = text + len;
6880 
6881     /* Count the number of lines we will need to add.  */
6882     nnew = 1;
6883     for (p = text; p < textend; ++p)
6884 	if (*p == '\n' && p + 1 < textend)
6885 	    ++nnew;
6886 
6887     /* Expand VEC->VECTOR if needed.  */
6888     if (vec->nlines + nnew >= vec->lines_alloced)
6889     {
6890 	if (vec->lines_alloced == 0)
6891 	    vec->lines_alloced = 10;
6892 	while (vec->nlines + nnew >= vec->lines_alloced)
6893 	    vec->lines_alloced *= 2;
6894 	vec->vector = xnrealloc (vec->vector,
6895 				 vec->lines_alloced, sizeof (*vec->vector));
6896     }
6897 
6898     /* Make room for the new lines in VEC->VECTOR.  */
6899     for (i = vec->nlines + nnew - 1; i >= pos + nnew; --i)
6900 	vec->vector[i] = vec->vector[i - nnew];
6901 
6902     if (pos > vec->nlines)
6903 	return 0;
6904 
6905     /* Actually add the lines, to VEC->VECTOR.  */
6906     i = pos;
6907     nextline_text = text;
6908     nextline_newline = 0;
6909     for (p = text; p < textend; ++p)
6910 	if (*p == '\n')
6911 	{
6912 	    nextline_newline = 1;
6913 	    if (p + 1 == textend)
6914 		/* If there are no characters beyond the last newline, we
6915 		   don't consider it another line.  */
6916 		break;
6917 	    nextline_len = p - nextline_text;
6918 	    q = xmalloc (sizeof (struct line) + nextline_len);
6919 	    q->vers = vers;
6920 	    q->text = (char *)q + sizeof (struct line);
6921 	    q->len = nextline_len;
6922 	    q->has_newline = nextline_newline;
6923 	    q->refcount = 1;
6924 	    memcpy (q->text, nextline_text, nextline_len);
6925 	    vec->vector[i++] = q;
6926 
6927 	    nextline_text = (char *)p + 1;
6928 	    nextline_newline = 0;
6929 	}
6930     nextline_len = p - nextline_text;
6931     q = xmalloc (sizeof (struct line) + nextline_len);
6932     q->vers = vers;
6933     q->text = (char *)q + sizeof (struct line);
6934     q->len = nextline_len;
6935     q->has_newline = nextline_newline;
6936     q->refcount = 1;
6937     memcpy (q->text, nextline_text, nextline_len);
6938     vec->vector[i] = q;
6939 
6940     vec->nlines += nnew;
6941 
6942     return 1;
6943 }
6944 
6945 
6946 
6947 /* Remove NLINES lines from VEC at position POS (where line 0 is the
6948    first line).  */
6949 static void
6950 linevector_delete (struct linevector *vec, unsigned int pos,
6951 		   unsigned int nlines)
6952 {
6953     unsigned int i;
6954     unsigned int last;
6955 
6956     last = vec->nlines - nlines;
6957     for (i = pos; i < pos + nlines; ++i)
6958     {
6959 	if (--vec->vector[i]->refcount == 0)
6960 	    free (vec->vector[i]);
6961     }
6962     for (i = pos; i < last; ++i)
6963 	vec->vector[i] = vec->vector[i + nlines];
6964     vec->nlines -= nlines;
6965 }
6966 
6967 
6968 
6969 /* Copy FROM to TO, copying the vectors but not the lines pointed to.  */
6970 static void
6971 linevector_copy (struct linevector *to, struct linevector *from)
6972 {
6973     unsigned int ln;
6974 
6975     for (ln = 0; ln < to->nlines; ++ln)
6976     {
6977 	if (--to->vector[ln]->refcount == 0)
6978 	    free (to->vector[ln]);
6979     }
6980     if (from->nlines > to->lines_alloced)
6981     {
6982 	if (to->lines_alloced == 0)
6983 	    to->lines_alloced = 10;
6984 	while (from->nlines > to->lines_alloced)
6985 	    to->lines_alloced *= 2;
6986 	to->vector = xnrealloc (to->vector,
6987 				to->lines_alloced,
6988 				sizeof (*to->vector));
6989     }
6990     memcpy (to->vector, from->vector,
6991 	    xtimes (from->nlines, sizeof (*to->vector)));
6992     to->nlines = from->nlines;
6993     for (ln = 0; ln < to->nlines; ++ln)
6994 	++to->vector[ln]->refcount;
6995 }
6996 
6997 
6998 
6999 /* Free storage associated with linevector.  */
7000 static void
7001 linevector_free (struct linevector *vec)
7002 {
7003     unsigned int ln;
7004 
7005     if (vec->vector != NULL)
7006     {
7007 	for (ln = 0; ln < vec->nlines; ++ln)
7008 	    if (--vec->vector[ln]->refcount == 0)
7009 		free (vec->vector[ln]);
7010 
7011 	free (vec->vector);
7012     }
7013 }
7014 
7015 
7016 
7017 /* Given a textual string giving the month (1-12), terminated with any
7018    character not recognized by atoi, return the 3 character name to
7019    print it with.  I do not think it is a good idea to change these
7020    strings based on the locale; they are standard abbreviations (for
7021    example in rfc822 mail messages) which should be widely understood.
7022    Returns a pointer into static readonly storage.  */
7023 static const char *
7024 month_printname (const char *month)
7025 {
7026     static const char *const months[] =
7027       {"Jan", "Feb", "Mar", "Apr", "May", "Jun",
7028 	 "Jul", "Aug", "Sep", "Oct", "Nov", "Dec"};
7029     int mnum;
7030 
7031     mnum = atoi (month);
7032     if (mnum < 1 || mnum > 12)
7033 	return "???";
7034     return months[mnum - 1];
7035 }
7036 
7037 
7038 
7039 /* Apply changes to the line vector LINES.  DIFFBUF is a buffer of
7040    length DIFFLEN holding the change text from an RCS file (the output
7041    of diff -n).  NAME is used in error messages.  The VERS field of
7042    any line added is set to ADDVERS.  The VERS field of any line
7043    deleted is set to DELVERS, unless DELVERS is NULL, in which case
7044    the VERS field of deleted lines is unchanged.  The function returns
7045    non-zero if the change text is applied successfully.  It returns
7046    zero if the change text does not appear to apply to LINES (e.g., a
7047    line number is invalid).  If the change text is improperly
7048    formatted (e.g., it is not the output of diff -n), the function
7049    calls error with a status of 1, causing the program to exit.  */
7050 static int
7051 apply_rcs_changes (struct linevector *lines, const char *diffbuf,
7052 		   size_t difflen, const char *name, RCSVers *addvers,
7053 		   RCSVers *delvers)
7054 {
7055     const char *p;
7056     const char *q;
7057     int op;
7058     /* The RCS format throws us for a loop in that the deltafrags (if
7059        we define a deltafrag as an add or a delete) need to be applied
7060        in reverse order.  So we stick them into a linked list.  */
7061     struct deltafrag {
7062 	enum {FRAG_ADD, FRAG_DELETE} type;
7063 	unsigned long pos;
7064 	unsigned long nlines;
7065 	const char *new_lines;
7066 	size_t len;
7067 	struct deltafrag *next;
7068     };
7069     struct deltafrag *dfhead;
7070     struct deltafrag *df;
7071     int err;
7072 
7073     dfhead = NULL;
7074     for (p = diffbuf; p != NULL && p < diffbuf + difflen; )
7075     {
7076 	op = *p++;
7077 	if (op != 'a' && op != 'd')
7078 	    /* Can't just skip over the deltafrag, because the value
7079 	       of op determines the syntax.  */
7080 	    error (1, 0, "unrecognized operation '\\x%x' in %s",
7081 		   op, name);
7082 	df = xmalloc (sizeof (struct deltafrag));
7083 	df->next = dfhead;
7084 	dfhead = df;
7085 	df->pos = strtoul (p, (char **) &q, 10);
7086 
7087 	if (p == q)
7088 	    error (1, 0, "number expected in %s", name);
7089 	p = q;
7090 	if (*p++ != ' ')
7091 	    error (1, 0, "space expected in %s", name);
7092 	df->nlines = strtoul (p, (char **) &q, 10);
7093 	if (p == q)
7094 	    error (1, 0, "number expected in %s", name);
7095 	p = q;
7096 	if (*p++ != '\012')
7097 	    error (1, 0, "linefeed expected in %s", name);
7098 
7099 	if (op == 'a')
7100 	{
7101 	    unsigned int i;
7102 
7103 	    df->type = FRAG_ADD;
7104 	    i = df->nlines;
7105 	    /* The text we want is the number of lines specified, or
7106 	       until the end of the value, whichever comes first (it
7107 	       will be the former except in the case where we are
7108 	       adding a line which does not end in newline).  */
7109 	    for (q = p; i != 0; ++q)
7110 		if (*q == '\n')
7111 		    --i;
7112 		else if (q == diffbuf + difflen)
7113 		{
7114 		    if (i != 1)
7115 			error (1, 0, "premature end of change in %s", name);
7116 		    else
7117 			break;
7118 		}
7119 
7120 	    /* Stash away a pointer to the text we are adding.  */
7121 	    df->new_lines = p;
7122 	    df->len = q - p;
7123 
7124 	    p = q;
7125 	}
7126 	else
7127 	{
7128 	    /* Correct for the fact that line numbers in RCS files
7129 	       start with 1.  */
7130 	    --df->pos;
7131 
7132 	    assert (op == 'd');
7133 	    df->type = FRAG_DELETE;
7134 	}
7135     }
7136 
7137     err = 0;
7138     for (df = dfhead; df != NULL;)
7139     {
7140 	unsigned int ln;
7141 
7142 	/* Once an error is encountered, just free the rest of the list and
7143 	 * return.
7144 	 */
7145 	if (!err)
7146 	    switch (df->type)
7147 	    {
7148 	    case FRAG_ADD:
7149 		if (! linevector_add (lines, df->new_lines, df->len, addvers,
7150 				      df->pos))
7151 		    err = 1;
7152 		break;
7153 	    case FRAG_DELETE:
7154 		if (df->pos > lines->nlines
7155 		    || df->pos + df->nlines > lines->nlines)
7156 		    return 0;
7157 		if (delvers != NULL)
7158 		    for (ln = df->pos; ln < df->pos + df->nlines; ++ln)
7159 			lines->vector[ln]->vers = delvers;
7160 		linevector_delete (lines, df->pos, df->nlines);
7161 		break;
7162 	    }
7163 
7164 	df = df->next;
7165 	free (dfhead);
7166 	dfhead = df;
7167     }
7168 
7169     return !err;
7170 }
7171 
7172 
7173 
7174 /* Apply an RCS change text to a buffer.  The function name starts
7175    with rcs rather than RCS because this does not take an RCSNode
7176    argument.  NAME is used in error messages.  TEXTBUF is the text
7177    buffer to change, and TEXTLEN is the size.  DIFFBUF and DIFFLEN are
7178    the change buffer and size.  The new buffer is returned in *RETBUF
7179    and *RETLEN.  The new buffer is allocated by xmalloc.
7180 
7181    Return 1 for success.  On failure, call error and return 0.  */
7182 int
7183 rcs_change_text (const char *name, char *textbuf, size_t textlen,
7184 		 const char *diffbuf, size_t difflen, char **retbuf,
7185 		 size_t *retlen)
7186 {
7187     struct linevector lines;
7188     int ret;
7189 
7190     *retbuf = NULL;
7191     *retlen = 0;
7192 
7193     linevector_init (&lines);
7194 
7195     if (! linevector_add (&lines, textbuf, textlen, NULL, 0))
7196 	error (1, 0, "cannot initialize line vector");
7197 
7198     if (! apply_rcs_changes (&lines, diffbuf, difflen, name, NULL, NULL))
7199     {
7200 	error (0, 0, "invalid change text in %s", name);
7201 	ret = 0;
7202     }
7203     else
7204     {
7205 	char *p;
7206 	size_t n;
7207 	unsigned int ln;
7208 
7209 	n = 0;
7210 	for (ln = 0; ln < lines.nlines; ++ln)
7211 	    /* 1 for \n */
7212 	    n += lines.vector[ln]->len + 1;
7213 
7214 	p = xmalloc (n);
7215 	*retbuf = p;
7216 
7217 	for (ln = 0; ln < lines.nlines; ++ln)
7218 	{
7219 	    memcpy (p, lines.vector[ln]->text, lines.vector[ln]->len);
7220 	    p += lines.vector[ln]->len;
7221 	    if (lines.vector[ln]->has_newline)
7222 		*p++ = '\n';
7223 	}
7224 
7225 	*retlen = p - *retbuf;
7226 	assert (*retlen <= n);
7227 
7228 	ret = 1;
7229     }
7230 
7231     linevector_free (&lines);
7232 
7233     return ret;
7234 }
7235 
7236 
7237 
7238 /* Walk the deltas in RCS to get to revision VERSION.
7239 
7240    If OP is RCS_ANNOTATE, then write annotations using cvs_output.
7241 
7242    If OP is RCS_FETCH, then put the contents of VERSION into a
7243    newly-malloc'd array and put a pointer to it in *TEXT.  Each line
7244    is \n terminated; the caller is responsible for converting text
7245    files if desired.  The total length is put in *LEN.
7246 
7247    If FP is non-NULL, it should be a file descriptor open to the file
7248    RCS with file position pointing to the deltas.  We close the file
7249    when we are done.
7250 
7251    If LOG is non-NULL, then *LOG is set to the log message of VERSION,
7252    and *LOGLEN is set to the length of the log message.
7253 
7254    On error, give a fatal error.  */
7255 void
7256 RCS_deltas (RCSNode *rcs, FILE *fp, struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf,
7257             const char *version, enum rcs_delta_op op, char **text,
7258             size_t *len, char **log, size_t *loglen)
7259 {
7260     struct rcsbuffer rcsbuf_local;
7261     char *branchversion;
7262     char *cpversion;
7263     char *key;
7264     char *value;
7265     size_t vallen;
7266     RCSVers *vers;
7267     RCSVers *prev_vers;
7268     RCSVers *trunk_vers;
7269     RCSVers *top_vers;
7270     char *next;
7271     int ishead, isnext, isversion, onbranch;
7272     Node *node;
7273     struct linevector headlines;
7274     struct linevector curlines;
7275     struct linevector trunklines;
7276     int foundhead;
7277     int backwards;
7278 
7279     assert (version);
7280 
7281     if (fp == NULL)
7282     {
7283 	rcsbuf_cache_open (rcs, rcs->delta_pos, &fp, &rcsbuf_local);
7284 	rcsbuf = &rcsbuf_local;
7285     }
7286 
7287    if (log) *log = NULL;
7288 
7289     ishead = 1;
7290     vers = NULL;
7291     prev_vers = NULL;
7292     trunk_vers = NULL;
7293     top_vers = NULL;
7294     next = NULL;
7295     onbranch = 0;
7296     foundhead = 0;
7297     backwards = 0;
7298 
7299     if (op == RCS_ANNOTATE_BACKWARDS) {
7300 	backwards = 1;
7301 	op = RCS_ANNOTATE;
7302     }
7303 
7304     linevector_init (&curlines);
7305     linevector_init (&headlines);
7306     linevector_init (&trunklines);
7307 
7308     /* We set BRANCHVERSION to the version we are currently looking
7309        for.  Initially, this is the version on the trunk from which
7310        VERSION branches off.  If VERSION is not a branch, then
7311        BRANCHVERSION is just VERSION.  */
7312     branchversion = xstrdup (version);
7313     cpversion = strchr (branchversion, '.');
7314     if (cpversion != NULL)
7315         cpversion = strchr (cpversion + 1, '.');
7316     if (cpversion != NULL)
7317         *cpversion = '\0';
7318 
7319     do {
7320 	if (! rcsbuf_getrevnum (rcsbuf, &key))
7321 	    error (1, 0, "unexpected EOF reading RCS file %s", rcs->print_path);
7322 
7323 	if (next != NULL && ! STREQ (next, key))
7324 	{
7325 	    /* This is not the next version we need.  It is a branch
7326                version which we want to ignore.  */
7327 	    isnext = 0;
7328 	    isversion = 0;
7329 	}
7330 	else
7331 	{
7332 	    isnext = 1;
7333 
7334 	    /* look up the revision */
7335 	    node = findnode (rcs->versions, key);
7336 	    if (node == NULL)
7337 	        error (1, 0,
7338 		       "mismatch in rcs file %s between deltas and deltatexts (%s)",
7339 		       rcs->print_path, key);
7340 
7341 	    /* Stash the previous version.  */
7342 	    prev_vers = vers;
7343 
7344 	    vers = node->data;
7345 	    next = vers->next;
7346 
7347 	    /* The top version is either HEAD or
7348 	       the last version on the branch.  */
7349 	    if (top_vers == NULL || onbranch && backwards)
7350 		top_vers = vers;
7351 
7352 	    /* Compare key and trunkversion now, because key points to
7353 	       storage controlled by rcsbuf_getkey.  */
7354 	    if (STREQ (branchversion, key))
7355 	        isversion = 1;
7356 	    else
7357 	        isversion = 0;
7358 
7359 	    if (backwards && STREQ (version, key)) {
7360 		if (onbranch) {
7361 		    unsigned int ln;
7362 
7363 		    for (ln = 0; ln < curlines.nlines; ++ln)
7364 			curlines.vector[ln]->vers = NULL;
7365 		} else {
7366 		    foundhead = 1;
7367 		    linevector_copy (&headlines, &curlines);
7368 		    break;
7369 		}
7370 	    }
7371 	}
7372 
7373 	while (1)
7374 	{
7375 	    if (! rcsbuf_getkey (rcsbuf, &key, &value))
7376 		error (1, 0, "%s does not appear to be a valid rcs file",
7377 		       rcs->print_path);
7378 
7379 	    if (log != NULL
7380 		&& isversion
7381 		&& STREQ (key, "log")
7382 		&& STREQ (branchversion, version))
7383 	    {
7384 		if (*log != NULL)
7385 		{
7386 		    error (0, 0, "Duplicate `log' keyword in RCS file (`%s').",
7387 		           rcs->print_path);
7388 		    free (*log);
7389 		}
7390 		*log = rcsbuf_valcopy (rcsbuf, value, 0, loglen);
7391 	    }
7392 
7393 	    if (STREQ (key, "text"))
7394 	    {
7395 		rcsbuf_valpolish (rcsbuf, value, 0, &vallen);
7396 		if (ishead)
7397 		{
7398 		    if (! linevector_add (&curlines, value, vallen,
7399 					  backwards ? vers : NULL, 0))
7400 			error (1, 0, "invalid rcs file %s", rcs->print_path);
7401 
7402 		    ishead = 0;
7403 		}
7404 		else if (isnext)
7405 		{
7406 		    RCSVers *addv, *delv;
7407 
7408 		    if (backwards) {
7409 			if (onbranch) {
7410 			    addv = NULL;
7411 			    delv = vers;
7412 			} else {
7413 			    addv = prev_vers;
7414 			    delv = NULL;
7415 			}
7416 		    } else {
7417 			if (onbranch) {
7418 			    addv = vers;
7419 			    delv = NULL;
7420 			} else {
7421 			    addv = NULL;
7422 			    delv = prev_vers;
7423 			}
7424 		    }
7425 		    if (! apply_rcs_changes (&curlines, value, vallen,
7426 					     rcs->path,
7427 					     addv, delv))
7428 			error (1, 0, "invalid change text in %s", rcs->print_path);
7429 		}
7430 		break;
7431 	    }
7432 	}
7433 
7434 	if (isversion)
7435 	{
7436 	    /* This is either the version we want, or it is the
7437                branchpoint to the version we want.  */
7438 	    if (STREQ (branchversion, version))
7439 	    {
7440 	        /* This is the version we want.  */
7441 		linevector_copy (&headlines, &curlines);
7442 		foundhead = 1;
7443 		/* If we are annotating backwards, we have to
7444 		   continue tracking when we're tracking a branch.  */
7445 		if (onbranch && !backwards)
7446 		{
7447 		    /* We have found this version by tracking up a
7448                        branch.  Restore back to the lines we saved
7449                        when we left the trunk, and continue tracking
7450                        down the trunk.  */
7451 		    onbranch = 0;
7452 		    vers = trunk_vers;
7453 		    next = vers->next;
7454 		    linevector_copy (&curlines, &trunklines);
7455 		}
7456 	    }
7457 	    else
7458 	    {
7459 	        Node *p;
7460 
7461 	        /* We need to look up the branch.  */
7462 	        onbranch = 1;
7463 
7464 		if (numdots (branchversion) < 2)
7465 		{
7466 		    unsigned int ln;
7467 
7468 		    /* We are leaving the trunk; save the current
7469                        lines so that we can restore them when we
7470                        continue tracking down the trunk.  */
7471 		    trunk_vers = vers;
7472 		    linevector_copy (&trunklines, &curlines);
7473 
7474 		    /* Reset the version information we have
7475                        accumulated so far.  It only applies to the
7476                        changes from the head to this version.  */
7477 		    for (ln = 0; ln < curlines.nlines; ++ln)
7478 		        curlines.vector[ln]->vers = NULL;
7479 		}
7480 
7481 		/* The next version we want is the entry on
7482                    VERS->branches which matches this branch.  For
7483                    example, suppose VERSION is 1.21.4.3 and
7484                    BRANCHVERSION was 1.21.  Then we look for an entry
7485                    starting with "1.21.4" and we'll put it (probably
7486                    1.21.4.1) in NEXT.  We'll advance BRANCHVERSION by
7487                    two dots (in this example, to 1.21.4.3).  */
7488 
7489 		if (vers->branches == NULL)
7490 		    error (1, 0, "missing expected branches in %s",
7491 			   rcs->print_path);
7492 		if (!cpversion)
7493 		    error (1, 0, "Invalid revision number in `%s'.",
7494 		           rcs->print_path);
7495 		*cpversion = '.';
7496 		++cpversion;
7497 		cpversion = strchr (cpversion, '.');
7498 		if (cpversion == NULL)
7499 		    error (1, 0, "version number confusion in %s",
7500 			   rcs->print_path);
7501 		for (p = vers->branches->list->next;
7502 		     p != vers->branches->list;
7503 		     p = p->next)
7504 		    if (strncmp (p->key, branchversion,
7505 				 cpversion - branchversion) == 0)
7506 			break;
7507 		if (p == vers->branches->list)
7508 		    error (1, 0, "missing expected branch in %s",
7509 			   rcs->print_path);
7510 
7511 		next = p->key;
7512 
7513 		cpversion = strchr (cpversion + 1, '.');
7514 		if (cpversion != NULL)
7515 		    *cpversion = '\0';
7516 	    }
7517 	}
7518 	if (op == RCS_FETCH && foundhead)
7519 	    break;
7520     } while (next != NULL);
7521 
7522     free (branchversion);
7523 
7524     rcsbuf_cache (rcs, rcsbuf);
7525 
7526     if (! foundhead)
7527         error (1, 0, "could not find desired version %s in %s",
7528 	       version, rcs->print_path);
7529 
7530     /* Now print out or return the data we have just computed.  */
7531     switch (op)
7532     {
7533 	case RCS_ANNOTATE:
7534 	    {
7535 		unsigned int ln;
7536 
7537 		for (ln = 0; ln < headlines.nlines; ++ln)
7538 		{
7539 		    char *buf;
7540 		    /* Period which separates year from month in date.  */
7541 		    char *ym;
7542 		    /* Period which separates month from day in date.  */
7543 		    char *md;
7544 		    RCSVers *prvers;
7545 
7546 		    prvers = headlines.vector[ln]->vers;
7547 		    if (prvers == NULL)
7548 			prvers = vers;
7549 
7550 		    buf = xmalloc (strlen (prvers->version) + 24);
7551 		    sprintf (buf, "%-12s (%-8.8s ",
7552 			     prvers->version,
7553 			     prvers->author);
7554 		    cvs_output (buf, 0);
7555 		    free (buf);
7556 
7557 		    /* Now output the date.  */
7558 		    ym = strchr (prvers->date, '.');
7559 		    if (ym == NULL)
7560 		    {
7561 			cvs_output ("??", 0);
7562 			cvs_output ("-???", 0);
7563 			cvs_output ("-??", 0);
7564 		    }
7565 		    else
7566 		    {
7567 			md = strchr (ym + 1, '.');
7568 			if (md == NULL)
7569 			    cvs_output ("??", 0);
7570 			else
7571 			    cvs_output (md + 1, 2);
7572 
7573 			cvs_output ("-", 1);
7574 			cvs_output (month_printname (ym + 1), 0);
7575 			cvs_output ("-", 1);
7576 			/* Only output the last two digits of the year.  Our output
7577 			   lines are long enough as it is without printing the
7578 			   century.  */
7579 			cvs_output (ym - 2, 2);
7580 		    }
7581 		    cvs_output ("): ", 0);
7582 		    if (headlines.vector[ln]->len != 0)
7583 			cvs_output (headlines.vector[ln]->text,
7584 				    headlines.vector[ln]->len);
7585 		    cvs_output ("\n", 1);
7586 		}
7587 	    }
7588 	    break;
7589 	case RCS_FETCH:
7590 	    {
7591 		char *p;
7592 		size_t n;
7593 		unsigned int ln;
7594 
7595 		assert (text != NULL);
7596 		assert (len != NULL);
7597 
7598 		n = 0;
7599 		for (ln = 0; ln < headlines.nlines; ++ln)
7600 		    /* 1 for \n */
7601 		    n += headlines.vector[ln]->len + 1;
7602 		p = xmalloc (n);
7603 		*text = p;
7604 		for (ln = 0; ln < headlines.nlines; ++ln)
7605 		{
7606 		    memcpy (p, headlines.vector[ln]->text,
7607 			    headlines.vector[ln]->len);
7608 		    p += headlines.vector[ln]->len;
7609 		    if (headlines.vector[ln]->has_newline)
7610 			*p++ = '\n';
7611 		}
7612 		*len = p - *text;
7613 		assert (*len <= n);
7614 	    }
7615 	    break;
7616     }
7617 
7618     linevector_free (&curlines);
7619     linevector_free (&headlines);
7620     linevector_free (&trunklines);
7621 
7622     return;
7623 }
7624 
7625 
7626 
7627 /* Read the information for a single delta from the RCS buffer RCSBUF,
7628    whose name is RCSFILE.  *KEYP and *VALP are either NULL, or the
7629    first key/value pair to read, as set by rcsbuf_getkey. Return NULL
7630    if there are no more deltas.  Store the key/value pair which
7631    terminated the read in *KEYP and *VALP.  */
7632 static RCSVers *
7633 getdelta (struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf, char *rcsfile, char **keyp, char **valp)
7634 {
7635     RCSVers *vnode;
7636     char *key, *value, *cp;
7637     Node *kv;
7638 
7639     /* Get revision number if it wasn't passed in. This uses
7640        rcsbuf_getkey because it doesn't croak when encountering
7641        unexpected input.  As a result, we have to play unholy games
7642        with `key' and `value'. */
7643     if (*keyp != NULL)
7644     {
7645 	key = *keyp;
7646 	value = *valp;
7647     }
7648     else
7649     {
7650 	if (! rcsbuf_getkey (rcsbuf, &key, &value))
7651 	    error (1, 0, "%s: unexpected EOF", rcsfile);
7652     }
7653 
7654     /* Make sure that it is a revision number and not a cabbage
7655        or something. */
7656     for (cp = key;
7657 	 (isdigit ((unsigned char) *cp) || *cp == '.') && *cp != '\0';
7658 	 cp++)
7659 	/* do nothing */ ;
7660     /* Note that when comparing with RCSDATE, we are not massaging
7661        VALUE from the string found in the RCS file.  This is OK since
7662        we know exactly what to expect.  */
7663     if (*cp != '\0' || strncmp (RCSDATE, value, (sizeof RCSDATE) - 1) != 0)
7664     {
7665 	*keyp = key;
7666 	*valp = value;
7667 	return NULL;
7668     }
7669 
7670     vnode = xmalloc (sizeof (RCSVers));
7671     memset (vnode, 0, sizeof (RCSVers));
7672 
7673     vnode->version = xstrdup (key);
7674 
7675     /* Grab the value of the date from value.  Note that we are not
7676        massaging VALUE from the string found in the RCS file.  */
7677     cp = value + (sizeof RCSDATE) - 1;	/* skip the "date" keyword */
7678     while (whitespace (*cp))		/* take space off front of value */
7679 	cp++;
7680 
7681     vnode->date = xstrdup (cp);
7682 
7683     /* Get author field.  */
7684     if (! rcsbuf_getkey (rcsbuf, &key, &value))
7685     {
7686 	error (1, 0, "unexpected end of file reading %s", rcsfile);
7687     }
7688     if (! STREQ (key, "author"))
7689 	error (1, 0, "\
7690 unable to parse %s; `author' not in the expected place", rcsfile);
7691     vnode->author = rcsbuf_valcopy (rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
7692 
7693     /* Get state field.  */
7694     if (! rcsbuf_getkey (rcsbuf, &key, &value))
7695     {
7696 	error (1, 0, "unexpected end of file reading %s", rcsfile);
7697     }
7698     if (! STREQ (key, "state"))
7699 	error (1, 0, "\
7700 unable to parse %s; `state' not in the expected place", rcsfile);
7701     vnode->state = rcsbuf_valcopy (rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
7702     /* The value is optional, according to rcsfile(5).  */
7703     if (value != NULL && STREQ (value, RCSDEAD))
7704     {
7705 	vnode->dead = 1;
7706     }
7707 
7708     /* Note that "branches" and "next" are in fact mandatory, according
7709        to doc/RCSFILES.  */
7710 
7711     /* fill in the branch list (if any branches exist) */
7712     if (! rcsbuf_getkey (rcsbuf, &key, &value))
7713     {
7714 	error (1, 0, "unexpected end of file reading %s", rcsfile);
7715     }
7716     if (STREQ (key, RCSDESC))
7717     {
7718 	*keyp = key;
7719 	*valp = value;
7720 	/* Probably could/should be a fatal error.  */
7721 	error (0, 0, "warning: 'branches' keyword missing from %s", rcsfile);
7722 	return vnode;
7723     }
7724     if (value != NULL)
7725     {
7726 	vnode->branches = getlist ();
7727 	/* Note that we are not massaging VALUE from the string found
7728            in the RCS file.  */
7729 	do_branches (vnode->branches, value);
7730     }
7731 
7732     /* fill in the next field if there is a next revision */
7733     if (! rcsbuf_getkey (rcsbuf, &key, &value))
7734     {
7735 	error (1, 0, "unexpected end of file reading %s", rcsfile);
7736     }
7737     if (STREQ (key, RCSDESC))
7738     {
7739 	*keyp = key;
7740 	*valp = value;
7741 	/* Probably could/should be a fatal error.  */
7742 	error (0, 0, "warning: 'next' keyword missing from %s", rcsfile);
7743 	return vnode;
7744     }
7745     if (value != NULL)
7746 	vnode->next = rcsbuf_valcopy (rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
7747 
7748     /*
7749      * XXX - this is where we put the symbolic link stuff???
7750      * (into newphrases in the deltas).
7751      */
7752     while (1)
7753     {
7754 	if (! rcsbuf_getkey (rcsbuf, &key, &value))
7755 	    error (1, 0, "unexpected end of file reading %s", rcsfile);
7756 
7757 	/* The `desc' keyword is the end of the deltas. */
7758 	if (strcmp (key, RCSDESC) == 0)
7759 	    break;
7760 
7761 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
7762 
7763 	/* The `hardlinks' value is a group of words, which must
7764 	   be parsed separately and added as a list to vnode->hardlinks. */
7765 	if (strcmp (key, "hardlinks") == 0)
7766 	{
7767 	    char *word;
7768 
7769 	    vnode->hardlinks = getlist();
7770 	    while ((word = rcsbuf_valword (rcsbuf, &value)) != NULL)
7771 	    {
7772 		Node *n = getnode();
7773 		n->key = word;
7774 		addnode (vnode->hardlinks, n);
7775 	    }
7776 	    continue;
7777 	}
7778 #endif
7779 
7780 	/* Enable use of repositories created by certain obsolete
7781 	   versions of CVS.  This code should remain indefinately;
7782 	   there is no procedure for converting old repositories, and
7783 	   checking for it is harmless.  */
7784 	if (STREQ (key, RCSDEAD))
7785 	{
7786 	    vnode->dead = 1;
7787 	    if (vnode->state != NULL)
7788 		free (vnode->state);
7789 	    vnode->state = xstrdup (RCSDEAD);
7790 	    continue;
7791 	}
7792 	/* if we have a new revision number, we're done with this delta */
7793 	for (cp = key;
7794 	     (isdigit ((unsigned char) *cp) || *cp == '.') && *cp != '\0';
7795 	     cp++)
7796 	    /* do nothing */ ;
7797 	/* Note that when comparing with RCSDATE, we are not massaging
7798 	   VALUE from the string found in the RCS file.  This is OK
7799 	   since we know exactly what to expect.  */
7800 	if (*cp == '\0' && strncmp (RCSDATE, value, strlen (RCSDATE)) == 0)
7801 	    break;
7802 
7803 	/* At this point, key and value represent a user-defined field
7804 	   in the delta node. */
7805 	if (vnode->other_delta == NULL)
7806 	    vnode->other_delta = getlist ();
7807 	kv = getnode ();
7808 	kv->type = rcsbuf_valcmp (rcsbuf) ? RCSCMPFLD : RCSFIELD;
7809 	kv->key = xstrdup (key);
7810 	kv->data = rcsbuf_valcopy (rcsbuf, value, kv->type == RCSFIELD, NULL);
7811 	if (addnode (vnode->other_delta, kv) != 0)
7812 	{
7813 	    /* Complaining about duplicate keys in newphrases seems
7814 	       questionable, in that we don't know what they mean and
7815 	       doc/RCSFILES has no prohibition on several newphrases
7816 	       with the same key.  But we can't store more than one as
7817 	       long as we store them in a List *.  */
7818 	    error (0, 0, "warning: duplicate key `%s' in RCS file `%s'",
7819 		   key, rcsfile);
7820 	    freenode (kv);
7821 	}
7822     }
7823 
7824     /* Return the key which caused us to fail back to the caller.  */
7825     *keyp = key;
7826     *valp = value;
7827 
7828     return vnode;
7829 }
7830 
7831 
7832 
7833 static void
7834 freedeltatext (Deltatext *d)
7835 {
7836     if (d->version != NULL)
7837 	free (d->version);
7838     if (d->log != NULL)
7839 	free (d->log);
7840     if (d->text != NULL)
7841 	free (d->text);
7842     if (d->other != NULL)
7843 	dellist (&d->other);
7844     free (d);
7845 }
7846 
7847 static Deltatext *
7848 RCS_getdeltatext (RCSNode *rcs, FILE *fp, struct rcsbuffer *rcsbuf)
7849 {
7850     char *num;
7851     char *key, *value;
7852     Node *p;
7853     Deltatext *d;
7854 
7855     /* Get the revision number. */
7856     if (! rcsbuf_getrevnum (rcsbuf, &num))
7857     {
7858 	/* If num == NULL, it means we reached EOF naturally.  That's
7859 	   fine. */
7860 	if (num == NULL)
7861 	    return NULL;
7862 	else
7863 	    error (1, 0, "%s: unexpected EOF", rcs->print_path);
7864     }
7865 
7866     p = findnode (rcs->versions, num);
7867     if (p == NULL)
7868 	error (1, 0, "mismatch in rcs file %s between deltas and deltatexts (%s)",
7869 	       rcs->print_path, num);
7870 
7871     d = xmalloc (sizeof (Deltatext));
7872     d->version = xstrdup (num);
7873 
7874     /* Get the log message. */
7875     if (! rcsbuf_getkey (rcsbuf, &key, &value))
7876 	error (1, 0, "%s, delta %s: unexpected EOF", rcs->print_path, num);
7877     if (! STREQ (key, "log"))
7878 	error (1, 0, "%s, delta %s: expected `log', got `%s'",
7879 	       rcs->print_path, num, key);
7880     d->log = rcsbuf_valcopy (rcsbuf, value, 0, NULL);
7881 
7882     /* Get random newphrases. */
7883     d->other = getlist();
7884     while (1)
7885     {
7886 	if (! rcsbuf_getkey (rcsbuf, &key, &value))
7887 	    error (1, 0, "%s, delta %s: unexpected EOF", rcs->print_path, num);
7888 
7889 	if (STREQ (key, "text"))
7890 	    break;
7891 
7892 	p = getnode();
7893 	p->type = rcsbuf_valcmp (rcsbuf) ? RCSCMPFLD : RCSFIELD;
7894 	p->key = xstrdup (key);
7895 	p->data = rcsbuf_valcopy (rcsbuf, value, p->type == RCSFIELD, NULL);
7896 	if (addnode (d->other, p) < 0)
7897 	{
7898 	    error (0, 0, "warning: %s, delta %s: duplicate field `%s'",
7899 		   rcs->print_path, num, key);
7900 	}
7901     }
7902 
7903     /* Get the change text. We already know that this key is `text'. */
7904     d->text = rcsbuf_valcopy (rcsbuf, value, 0, &d->len);
7905 
7906     return d;
7907 }
7908 
7909 
7910 
7911 /* RCS output functions, for writing RCS format files from RCSNode
7912    structures.
7913 
7914    For most of this work, RCS 5.7 uses an `aprintf' function which aborts
7915    program upon error.  Instead, these functions check the output status
7916    of the stream right before closing it, and aborts if an error condition
7917    is found.  The RCS solution is probably the better one: it produces
7918    more overhead, but will produce a clearer diagnostic in the case of
7919    catastrophic error.  In either case, however, the repository will probably
7920    not get corrupted. */
7921 static int
7922 putsymbol_proc (Node *symnode, void *fparg)
7923 {
7924     FILE *fp = fparg;
7925 
7926     /* A fiddly optimization: this code used to just call fprintf, but
7927        in an old repository with hundreds of tags this can get called
7928        hundreds of thousands of times when doing a cvs tag.  Since
7929        tagging is a relatively common operation, and using putc and
7930        fputs is just as comprehensible, the change is worthwhile.  */
7931     putc ('\n', fp);
7932     putc ('\t', fp);
7933     fputs (symnode->key, fp);
7934     putc (':', fp);
7935     fputs (symnode->data, fp);
7936     return 0;
7937 }
7938 
7939 
7940 
7941 /* putlock_proc is like putsymbol_proc, but key and data are reversed. */
7942 static int
7943 putlock_proc (Node *symnode, void *fp)
7944 {
7945     return fprintf (fp, "\n\t%s:%s", (char *)symnode->data, symnode->key);
7946 }
7947 
7948 
7949 
7950 static int
7951 putrcsfield_proc (Node *node, void *vfp)
7952 {
7953     FILE *fp = vfp;
7954 
7955     /* Some magic keys used internally by CVS start with `;'. Skip them. */
7956     if (node->key[0] == ';')
7957 	return 0;
7958 
7959     fprintf (fp, "\n%s\t", node->key);
7960     if (node->data != NULL)
7961     {
7962 	/* If the field's value contains evil characters,
7963 	   it must be stringified. */
7964 	/* FIXME: This does not quite get it right.  "7jk8f" is not a valid
7965 	   value for a value in a newpharse, according to doc/RCSFILES,
7966 	   because digits are not valid in an "id".  We might do OK by
7967 	   always writing strings (enclosed in @@).  Would be nice to
7968 	   explicitly mention this one way or another in doc/RCSFILES.
7969 	   A case where we are wrong in a much more clear-cut way is that
7970 	   we let through non-graphic characters such as whitespace and
7971 	   control characters.  */
7972 
7973 	if (node->type == RCSCMPFLD || strpbrk (node->data, "$,.:;@") == NULL)
7974 	    fputs (node->data, fp);
7975 	else
7976 	{
7977 	    putc ('@', fp);
7978 	    expand_at_signs (node->data, (off_t) strlen (node->data), fp);
7979 	    putc ('@', fp);
7980 	}
7981     }
7982 
7983     /* desc, log and text fields should not be terminated with semicolon;
7984        all other fields should be. */
7985     if (! STREQ (node->key, "desc") &&
7986 	! STREQ (node->key, "log") &&
7987 	! STREQ (node->key, "text"))
7988     {
7989 	putc (';', fp);
7990     }
7991     return 0;
7992 }
7993 
7994 
7995 
7996 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
7997 
7998 /* Save a filename in a `hardlinks' RCS field.  NODE->KEY will contain
7999    a full pathname, but currently only basenames are stored in the RCS
8000    node.  Assume that the filename includes nasty characters and
8001    @-escape it. */
8002 
8003 static int
8004 puthardlink_proc (node, vfp)
8005     Node *node;
8006     void *vfp;
8007 {
8008     FILE *fp = vfp;
8009     char *basename = strrchr (node->key, '/');
8010 
8011     if (basename == NULL)
8012 	basename = node->key;
8013     else
8014 	++basename;
8015 
8016     putc ('\t', fp);
8017     putc ('@', fp);
8018     (void) expand_at_signs (basename, strlen (basename), fp);
8019     putc ('@', fp);
8020 
8021     return 0;
8022 }
8023 
8024 #endif /* PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT */
8025 
8026 
8027 
8028 /* Output the admin node for RCS into stream FP. */
8029 static void
8030 RCS_putadmin (RCSNode *rcs, FILE *fp)
8031 {
8032     fprintf (fp, "%s\t%s;\n", RCSHEAD, rcs->head ? rcs->head : "");
8033     if (rcs->branch)
8034 	fprintf (fp, "%s\t%s;\n", RCSBRANCH, rcs->branch);
8035 
8036     fputs ("access", fp);
8037     if (rcs->access)
8038     {
8039 	char *p, *s;
8040 	s = xstrdup (rcs->access);
8041 	for (p = strtok (s, " \n\t"); p != NULL; p = strtok (NULL, " \n\t"))
8042 	    fprintf (fp, "\n\t%s", p);
8043 	free (s);
8044     }
8045     fputs (";\n", fp);
8046 
8047     fputs (RCSSYMBOLS, fp);
8048     /* If we haven't had to convert the symbols to a list yet, don't
8049        force a conversion now; just write out the string.  */
8050     if (rcs->symbols == NULL && rcs->symbols_data != NULL)
8051     {
8052 	fputs ("\n\t", fp);
8053 	fputs (rcs->symbols_data, fp);
8054     }
8055     else
8056 	walklist (RCS_symbols (rcs), putsymbol_proc, fp);
8057     fputs (";\n", fp);
8058 
8059     fputs ("locks", fp);
8060     if (rcs->locks_data)
8061 	fprintf (fp, "\t%s", rcs->locks_data);
8062     else if (rcs->locks)
8063 	walklist (rcs->locks, putlock_proc, fp);
8064     if (rcs->strict_locks)
8065 	fprintf (fp, "; strict");
8066     fputs (";\n", fp);
8067 
8068     if (rcs->comment)
8069     {
8070 	fprintf (fp, "comment\t@");
8071 	expand_at_signs (rcs->comment, (off_t) strlen (rcs->comment), fp);
8072 	fputs ("@;\n", fp);
8073     }
8074     if (rcs->expand && ! STREQ (rcs->expand, "kv"))
8075 	fprintf (fp, "%s\t@%s@;\n", RCSEXPAND, rcs->expand);
8076 
8077     walklist (rcs->other, putrcsfield_proc, fp);
8078 
8079     putc ('\n', fp);
8080 }
8081 
8082 
8083 
8084 static void
8085 putdelta (RCSVers *vers, FILE *fp)
8086 {
8087     Node *bp, *start;
8088 
8089     /* Skip if no revision was supplied, or if it is outdated (cvs admin -o) */
8090     if (vers == NULL || vers->outdated)
8091 	return;
8092 
8093     fprintf (fp, "\n%s\n%s\t%s;\t%s %s;\t%s %s;\nbranches",
8094 	     vers->version,
8095 	     RCSDATE, vers->date,
8096 	     "author", vers->author,
8097 	     "state", vers->state ? vers->state : "");
8098 
8099     if (vers->branches != NULL)
8100     {
8101 	start = vers->branches->list;
8102 	for (bp = start->next; bp != start; bp = bp->next)
8103 	    fprintf (fp, "\n\t%s", bp->key);
8104     }
8105 
8106     fprintf (fp, ";\nnext\t%s;", vers->next ? vers->next : "");
8107 
8108     walklist (vers->other_delta, putrcsfield_proc, fp);
8109 
8110 #ifdef PRESERVE_PERMISSIONS_SUPPORT
8111     if (vers->hardlinks)
8112     {
8113 	fprintf (fp, "\nhardlinks");
8114 	walklist (vers->hardlinks, puthardlink_proc, fp);
8115 	putc (';', fp);
8116     }
8117 #endif
8118     putc ('\n', fp);
8119 }
8120 
8121 
8122 
8123 static void
8124 RCS_putdtree (RCSNode *rcs, char *rev, FILE *fp)
8125 {
8126     RCSVers *versp;
8127     Node *p, *branch;
8128 
8129     /* Previously, this function used a recursive implementation, but
8130        if the trunk has a huge number of revisions and the program
8131        stack is not big, a stack overflow could occur, so this
8132        nonrecursive version was developed to be more safe. */
8133     Node *branchlist, *onebranch;
8134     List *branches;
8135     List *onebranchlist;
8136 
8137     if (rev == NULL)
8138 	return;
8139 
8140     branches = getlist();
8141 
8142     for (; rev != NULL;)
8143     {
8144 	/* Find the delta node for this revision. */
8145 	p = findnode (rcs->versions, rev);
8146 	if (p == NULL)
8147 	{
8148 	    error (1, 0,
8149 		   "error parsing repository file %s, file may be corrupt.",
8150 		   rcs->path);
8151 	}
8152 
8153 	versp = p->data;
8154 
8155 	/* Print the delta node and go for its `next' node.  This
8156 	   prints the trunk. If there are any branches printed on this
8157 	   revision, mark we have some. */
8158 	putdelta (versp, fp);
8159 	/* Store branch information into branch list so to write its
8160 	   trunk afterwards */
8161 	if (versp->branches != NULL)
8162 	{
8163 	    branch = getnode();
8164 	    branch->data = versp->branches;
8165 
8166 	    addnode(branches, branch);
8167 	}
8168 
8169 	rev = versp->next;
8170     }
8171 
8172     /* If there are any branches printed on this revision,
8173        print those trunks as well. */
8174     branchlist = branches->list;
8175     for (branch = branchlist->next;
8176 	 branch != branchlist;
8177 	 branch = branch->next)
8178     {
8179 	onebranchlist = (List *)(branch->data);
8180 	onebranch = onebranchlist->list;
8181 	for (p = onebranch->next; p != onebranch; p = p->next)
8182 	    RCS_putdtree (rcs, p->key, fp);
8183 
8184 	branch->data = NULL; /* so to prevent its freeing on dellist */
8185     }
8186 
8187     dellist(&branches);
8188 }
8189 
8190 
8191 
8192 static void
8193 RCS_putdesc (RCSNode *rcs, FILE *fp)
8194 {
8195     fprintf (fp, "\n\n%s\n@", RCSDESC);
8196     if (rcs->desc != NULL)
8197     {
8198 	off_t len = (off_t) strlen (rcs->desc);
8199 	if (len > 0)
8200 	{
8201 	    expand_at_signs (rcs->desc, len, fp);
8202 	    if (rcs->desc[len-1] != '\n')
8203 		putc ('\n', fp);
8204 	}
8205     }
8206     fputs ("@\n", fp);
8207 }
8208 
8209 
8210 
8211 static void
8212 putdeltatext (FILE *fp, Deltatext *d)
8213 {
8214     fprintf (fp, "\n\n%s\nlog\n@", d->version);
8215     if (d->log != NULL)
8216     {
8217 	int loglen = strlen (d->log);
8218 	expand_at_signs (d->log, (off_t) loglen, fp);
8219 	if (d->log[loglen-1] != '\n')
8220 	    putc ('\n', fp);
8221     }
8222     putc ('@', fp);
8223 
8224     walklist (d->other, putrcsfield_proc, fp);
8225 
8226     fputs ("\ntext\n@", fp);
8227     if (d->text != NULL)
8228 	expand_at_signs (d->text, (off_t) d->len, fp);
8229     fputs ("@\n", fp);
8230 }
8231 
8232 
8233 
8234 /* TODO: the whole mechanism for updating deltas is kludgey... more
8235    sensible would be to supply all the necessary info in a `newdeltatext'
8236    field for RCSVers nodes. -twp */
8237 
8238 /* Copy delta text nodes from FIN to FOUT.  If NEWDTEXT is non-NULL, it
8239    is a new delta text node, and should be added to the tree at the
8240    node whose revision number is INSERTPT.  (Note that trunk nodes are
8241    written in decreasing order, and branch nodes are written in
8242    increasing order.) */
8243 static void
8244 RCS_copydeltas (RCSNode *rcs, FILE *fin, struct rcsbuffer *rcsbufin,
8245 		FILE *fout, Deltatext *newdtext, char *insertpt)
8246 {
8247     int actions;
8248     RCSVers *dadmin;
8249     Node *np;
8250     int insertbefore, found;
8251     char *bufrest;
8252     int nls;
8253     size_t buflen;
8254 #ifndef HAVE_MMAP
8255     char buf[8192];
8256     int got;
8257 #endif
8258 
8259     /* Count the number of versions for which we have to do some
8260        special operation.  */
8261     actions = walklist (rcs->versions, count_delta_actions, NULL);
8262 
8263     /* Make a note of whether NEWDTEXT should be inserted
8264        before or after its INSERTPT. */
8265     insertbefore = (newdtext != NULL && numdots (newdtext->version) == 1);
8266 
8267     while (actions != 0 || newdtext != NULL)
8268     {
8269 	Deltatext *dtext;
8270 
8271 	dtext = RCS_getdeltatext (rcs, fin, rcsbufin);
8272 
8273 	/* We shouldn't hit EOF here, because that would imply that
8274            some action was not taken, or that we could not insert
8275            NEWDTEXT.  */
8276 	if (dtext == NULL)
8277 	    error (1, 0, "internal error: EOF too early in RCS_copydeltas");
8278 
8279 	found = (insertpt != NULL && STREQ (dtext->version, insertpt));
8280 	if (found && insertbefore)
8281 	{
8282 	    putdeltatext (fout, newdtext);
8283 	    newdtext = NULL;
8284 	    insertpt = NULL;
8285 	}
8286 
8287 	np = findnode (rcs->versions, dtext->version);
8288 	dadmin = np->data;
8289 
8290 	/* If this revision has been outdated, just skip it. */
8291 	if (dadmin->outdated)
8292 	{
8293 	    freedeltatext (dtext);
8294 	    --actions;
8295 	    continue;
8296 	}
8297 
8298 	/* Update the change text for this delta.  New change text
8299 	   data may come from cvs admin -m, cvs admin -o, or cvs ci. */
8300 	if (dadmin->text != NULL)
8301 	{
8302 	    if (dadmin->text->log != NULL || dadmin->text->text != NULL)
8303 		--actions;
8304 	    if (dadmin->text->log != NULL)
8305 	    {
8306 		free (dtext->log);
8307 		dtext->log = dadmin->text->log;
8308 		dadmin->text->log = NULL;
8309 	    }
8310 	    if (dadmin->text->text != NULL)
8311 	    {
8312 		free (dtext->text);
8313 		dtext->text = dadmin->text->text;
8314 		dtext->len = dadmin->text->len;
8315 		dadmin->text->text = NULL;
8316 	    }
8317 	}
8318 	putdeltatext (fout, dtext);
8319 	freedeltatext (dtext);
8320 
8321 	if (found && !insertbefore)
8322 	{
8323 	    putdeltatext (fout, newdtext);
8324 	    newdtext = NULL;
8325 	    insertpt = NULL;
8326 	}
8327     }
8328 
8329     /* Copy the rest of the file directly, without bothering to
8330        interpret it.  The caller will handle error checking by calling
8331        ferror.
8332 
8333        We just wrote a newline to the file, either in putdeltatext or
8334        in the caller.  However, we may not have read the corresponding
8335        newline from the file, because rcsbuf_getkey returns as soon as
8336        it finds the end of the '@' string for the desc or text key.
8337        Therefore, we may read three newlines when we should really
8338        only write two, and we check for that case here.  This is not
8339        an semantically important issue; we only do it to make our RCS
8340        files look traditional.  */
8341 
8342     nls = 3;
8343 
8344     rcsbuf_get_buffered (rcsbufin, &bufrest, &buflen);
8345     if (buflen > 0)
8346     {
8347 	if (bufrest[0] != '\n'
8348 	    || strncmp (bufrest, "\n\n\n", buflen < 3 ? buflen : 3) != 0)
8349 	{
8350 	    nls = 0;
8351 	}
8352 	else
8353 	{
8354 	    if (buflen < 3)
8355 		nls -= buflen;
8356 	    else
8357 	    {
8358 		++bufrest;
8359 		--buflen;
8360 		nls = 0;
8361 	    }
8362 	}
8363 
8364 	fwrite (bufrest, 1, buflen, fout);
8365     }
8366 #ifndef HAVE_MMAP
8367     /* This bit isn't necessary when using mmap since the entire file
8368      * will already be available via the RCS buffer.  Besides, the
8369      * mmap code doesn't always keep the file pointer up to date, so
8370      * this adds some data twice.
8371      */
8372     while ((got = fread (buf, 1, sizeof buf, fin)) != 0)
8373     {
8374 	if (nls > 0
8375 	    && got >= nls
8376 	    && buf[0] == '\n'
8377 	    && strncmp (buf, "\n\n\n", nls) == 0)
8378 	{
8379 	    fwrite (buf + 1, 1, got - 1, fout);
8380 	}
8381 	else
8382 	{
8383 	    fwrite (buf, 1, got, fout);
8384 	}
8385 
8386 	nls = 0;
8387     }
8388 #endif /* HAVE_MMAP */
8389 }
8390 
8391 
8392 
8393 /* A helper procedure for RCS_copydeltas.  This is called via walklist
8394    to count the number of RCS revisions for which some special action
8395    is required.  */
8396 static int
8397 count_delta_actions (Node *np, void *ignore)
8398 {
8399     RCSVers *dadmin = np->data;
8400 
8401     if (dadmin->outdated)
8402 	return 1;
8403 
8404     if (dadmin->text != NULL
8405 	&& (dadmin->text->log != NULL || dadmin->text->text != NULL))
8406     {
8407 	return 1;
8408     }
8409 
8410     return 0;
8411 }
8412 
8413 
8414 
8415 /*
8416  * Clean up temporary files.
8417  *
8418  * NOTES
8419  *   This function needs to be reentrant since a call to exit() can cause a
8420  *   call to this function, which can then be interrupted by a signal, which
8421  *   can cause a second call to this function.
8422  *
8423  * RETURNS
8424  *   Nothing.
8425  */
8426 static void
8427 rcs_cleanup (void)
8428 {
8429     TRACE (TRACE_FUNCTION, "rcs_cleanup()");
8430 
8431     /* FIXME: Do not perform buffered I/O from an interrupt handler like
8432      * this (via error).  However, I'm leaving the error-calling code there
8433      * in the hope that on the rare occasion the error call is actually made
8434      * (e.g., a fluky I/O error or permissions problem prevents the deletion
8435      * of a just-created file) reentrancy won't be an issue.
8436      */
8437 
8438     /* We don't want to be interrupted during calls which set globals to NULL,
8439      * but we know that by the time we reach this function, interrupts have
8440      * already been blocked.
8441      */
8442     if (rcs_lockfile != NULL)
8443     {
8444 	/* Use a tmp var since any of these functions could call exit, causing
8445 	 * us to be called a second time.
8446 	 */
8447 	char *tmp = rcs_lockfile;
8448 	rcs_lockfile = NULL;
8449 	if (rcs_lockfd >= 0)
8450 	{
8451 	    if (close (rcs_lockfd) != 0)
8452 		error (0, errno, "error closing lock file %s", tmp);
8453 	    rcs_lockfd = -1;
8454 	}
8455 
8456 	/* Note that the checks for existence_error are because we can be
8457 	 * called from a signal handler, so we don't know whether the
8458 	 * files got created.
8459 	 */
8460 	if (unlink_file (tmp) < 0
8461 	    && !existence_error (errno))
8462 	    error (0, errno, "cannot remove %s", tmp);
8463     }
8464 }
8465 
8466 
8467 
8468 /* RCS_internal_lockfile and RCS_internal_unlockfile perform RCS-style
8469    locking on the specified RCSFILE: for a file called `foo,v', open
8470    for writing a file called `,foo,'.
8471 
8472    Note that we what do here is quite different from what RCS does.
8473    RCS creates the ,foo, file before it reads the RCS file (if it
8474    knows that it will be writing later), so that it actually serves as
8475    a lock.  We don't; instead we rely on CVS writelocks.  This means
8476    that if someone is running RCS on the file at the same time they
8477    are running CVS on it, they might lose (we read the file,
8478    then RCS writes it, then we write it, clobbering the
8479    changes made by RCS).  I believe the current sentiment about this
8480    is "well, don't do that".
8481 
8482    A concern has been expressed about whether adopting the RCS
8483    strategy would slow us down.  I don't think so, since we need to
8484    write the ,foo, file anyway (unless perhaps if O_EXCL is slower or
8485    something).
8486 
8487    These do not perform quite the same function as the RCS -l option
8488    for locking files: they are intended to prevent competing RCS
8489    processes from stomping all over each other's laundry.  Hence,
8490    they are `internal' locking functions.
8491 
8492    If there is an error, give a fatal error; if we return we always
8493    return a non-NULL value.  */
8494 static FILE *
8495 rcs_internal_lockfile (char *rcsfile)
8496 {
8497     struct stat rstat;
8498     FILE *fp;
8499     static int first_call = 1;
8500 
8501     if (first_call)
8502     {
8503 	first_call = 0;
8504 	/* Clean up if we get a signal or exit.  */
8505 	cleanup_register (rcs_cleanup);
8506     }
8507 
8508     /* Get the lock file name: `,file,' for RCS file `file,v'. */
8509     assert (rcs_lockfile == NULL);
8510     assert (rcs_lockfd < 0);
8511     rcs_lockfile = rcs_lockfilename (rcsfile);
8512 
8513     /* Use the existing RCS file mode, or read-only if this is a new
8514        file.  (Really, this is a lie -- if this is a new file,
8515        RCS_checkin uses the permissions from the working copy.  For
8516        actually creating the file, we use 0444 as a safe default mode.) */
8517     if (stat (rcsfile, &rstat) < 0)
8518     {
8519 	if (existence_error (errno))
8520 	    rstat.st_mode = S_IRUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH;
8521 	else
8522 	    error (1, errno, "cannot stat %s", rcsfile);
8523     }
8524 
8525     /* Try to open exclusively.  POSIX.1 guarantees that O_EXCL|O_CREAT
8526        guarantees an exclusive open.  According to the RCS source, with
8527        NFS v2 we must also throw in O_TRUNC and use an open mask that makes
8528        the file unwriteable.  For extensive justification, see the comments for
8529        rcswriteopen() in rcsedit.c, in RCS 5.7.  This is kind of pointless
8530        in the CVS case; see comment at the start of this file concerning
8531        general ,foo, file strategy.
8532 
8533        There is some sentiment that with NFSv3 and such, that one can
8534        rely on O_EXCL these days.  This might be true for unix (I
8535        don't really know), but I am still pretty skeptical in the case
8536        of the non-unix systems.  */
8537     rcs_lockfd = open (rcs_lockfile,
8538 		       OPEN_BINARY | O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_EXCL | O_TRUNC,
8539 		       S_IRUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH);
8540 
8541     if (rcs_lockfd < 0)
8542     {
8543 	error (1, errno, "could not open lock file `%s'", rcs_lockfile);
8544     }
8545 
8546     /* Force the file permissions, and return a stream object. */
8547     /* Because we change the modes later, we don't worry about
8548        this in the non-HAVE_FCHMOD case.  */
8549 #ifdef HAVE_FCHMOD
8550     if (fchmod (rcs_lockfd, rstat.st_mode) < 0)
8551 	error (1, errno, "cannot change mode for %s", rcs_lockfile);
8552 #endif
8553     fp = fdopen (rcs_lockfd, FOPEN_BINARY_WRITE);
8554     if (fp == NULL)
8555 	error (1, errno, "cannot fdopen %s", rcs_lockfile);
8556 
8557     return fp;
8558 }
8559 
8560 
8561 
8562 static void
8563 rcs_internal_unlockfile (FILE *fp, char *rcsfile)
8564 {
8565     assert (rcs_lockfile != NULL);
8566     assert (rcs_lockfd >= 0);
8567 
8568     /* Abort if we could not write everything successfully to LOCKFILE.
8569        This is not a great error-handling mechanism, but should prevent
8570        corrupting the repository. */
8571 
8572     if (ferror (fp))
8573 	/* Using errno here may well be misleanding since the most recent
8574 	   call that set errno may not have anything whatsoever to do with
8575 	   the error that set the flag, but it's better than nothing.  The
8576 	   real solution is to check each call to fprintf rather than waiting
8577 	   until the end like this.  */
8578 	error (1, errno, "error writing to lock file %s", rcs_lockfile);
8579 
8580     /* Flush and sync the file, or the user may be told the commit completed,
8581      * while a server crash/power failure could still cause the data to be
8582      * lost.
8583      *
8584      * Invoking rename(",<file>," , "<file>,v") on Linux and almost all UNIXs
8585      * only flushes the inode for the target file to disk, it does not
8586      * guarantee flush of the kernel buffers allocated for the ,<file>,.
8587      * Depending upon the load on the machine, the Linux kernel's flush daemon
8588      * process may not flush for a while.  In the meantime the CVS transaction
8589      * could have been declared committed to the end CVS user (CVS process has
8590      * returned the final "OK").  If the machine crashes prior to syncing the
8591      * changes to disk, the committed transaction can be lost.
8592      */
8593     if (fflush (fp) != 0)
8594 	error (1, errno, "error flushing file `%s' to kernel buffers",
8595 	       rcs_lockfile);
8596 #ifdef HAVE_FSYNC
8597     if (fsync (rcs_lockfd) < 0)
8598 	error (1, errno, "error fsyncing file `%s'", rcs_lockfile);
8599 #endif
8600 
8601     if (fclose (fp) == EOF)
8602 	error (1, errno, "error closing lock file %s", rcs_lockfile);
8603     rcs_lockfd = -1;
8604 
8605     rename_file (rcs_lockfile, rcsfile);
8606 
8607     {
8608 	/* Use a temporary to make sure there's no interval
8609 	   (after rcs_lockfile has been freed but before it's set to NULL)
8610 	   during which the signal handler's use of rcs_lockfile would
8611 	   reference freed memory.  */
8612 	char *tmp = rcs_lockfile;
8613 	rcs_lockfile = NULL;
8614 	free (tmp);
8615     }
8616 }
8617 
8618 
8619 
8620 static char *
8621 rcs_lockfilename (const char *rcsfile)
8622 {
8623     char *lockfile, *lockp;
8624     const char *rcsbase, *rcsp, *rcsend;
8625     int rcslen;
8626 
8627     /* Create the lockfile name. */
8628     rcslen = strlen (rcsfile);
8629     lockfile = xmalloc (rcslen + 10);
8630     rcsbase = last_component (rcsfile);
8631     rcsend = rcsfile + rcslen - sizeof(RCSEXT);
8632     for (lockp = lockfile, rcsp = rcsfile; rcsp < rcsbase; ++rcsp)
8633 	*lockp++ = *rcsp;
8634     *lockp++ = ',';
8635     while (rcsp <= rcsend)
8636 	*lockp++ = *rcsp++;
8637     *lockp++ = ',';
8638     *lockp = '\0';
8639 
8640     return lockfile;
8641 }
8642 
8643 
8644 
8645 /* Rewrite an RCS file.  The basic idea here is that the caller should
8646    first call RCS_reparsercsfile, then munge the data structures as
8647    desired (via RCS_delete_revs, RCS_settag, &c), then call RCS_rewrite.  */
8648 void
8649 RCS_rewrite (RCSNode *rcs, Deltatext *newdtext, char *insertpt)
8650 {
8651     FILE *fin, *fout;
8652     struct rcsbuffer rcsbufin;
8653 
8654     if (noexec)
8655 	return;
8656 
8657     /* Make sure we're operating on an actual file and not a symlink.  */
8658     resolve_symlink (&(rcs->path));
8659 
8660     fout = rcs_internal_lockfile (rcs->path);
8661 
8662     RCS_putadmin (rcs, fout);
8663     RCS_putdtree (rcs, rcs->head, fout);
8664     RCS_putdesc (rcs, fout);
8665 
8666     /* Open the original RCS file and seek to the first delta text. */
8667     rcsbuf_cache_open (rcs, rcs->delta_pos, &fin, &rcsbufin);
8668 
8669     /* Update delta_pos to the current position in the output file.
8670        Do NOT move these statements: they must be done after fin has
8671        been positioned at the old delta_pos, but before any delta
8672        texts have been written to fout.
8673      */
8674     rcs->delta_pos = ftello (fout);
8675     if (rcs->delta_pos == -1)
8676 	error (1, errno, "cannot ftello in RCS file %s", rcs->path);
8677 
8678     RCS_copydeltas (rcs, fin, &rcsbufin, fout, newdtext, insertpt);
8679 
8680     /* We don't want to call rcsbuf_cache here, since we're about to
8681        delete the file.  */
8682     rcsbuf_close (&rcsbufin);
8683     if (ferror (fin))
8684 	/* The only case in which using errno here would be meaningful
8685 	   is if we happen to have left errno unmolested since the call
8686 	   which produced the error (e.g. fread).  That is pretty
8687 	   fragile even if it happens to sometimes be true.  The real
8688 	   solution is to make sure that all the code which reads
8689 	   from fin checks for errors itself (some does, some doesn't).  */
8690 	error (0, 0, "warning: ferror set while rewriting RCS file `%s'", rcs->path);
8691     if (fclose (fin) < 0)
8692 	error (0, errno, "warning: closing RCS file `%s'", rcs->path);
8693 
8694     rcs_internal_unlockfile (fout, rcs->path);
8695 }
8696 
8697 
8698 
8699 /* Abandon changes to an RCS file. */
8700 void
8701 RCS_abandon (RCSNode *rcs)
8702 {
8703     free_rcsnode_contents (rcs);
8704     rcs->symbols_data = NULL;
8705     rcs->expand = NULL;
8706     rcs->access = NULL;
8707     rcs->locks_data = NULL;
8708     rcs->comment = NULL;
8709     rcs->desc = NULL;
8710     rcs->flags |= PARTIAL;
8711 }
8712 
8713 
8714 
8715 /*
8716  * For a given file with full pathname PATH and revision number REV,
8717  * produce a file label suitable for passing to diff.  The default
8718  * file label as used by RCS 5.7 looks like this:
8719  *
8720  *	FILENAME <tab> YYYY/MM/DD <sp> HH:MM:SS <tab> REVNUM
8721  *
8722  * The date and time used are the revision's last checkin date and time.
8723  * If REV is NULL, use the working copy's mtime instead.
8724  *
8725  * /dev/null is not statted but assumed to have been created on the Epoch.
8726  * At least using the POSIX.2 definition of patch, this should cause creation
8727  * of files on platforms such as Windoze where the null IO device isn't named
8728  * /dev/null to be parsed by patch properly.
8729  */
8730 char *
8731 make_file_label (const char *path, const char *rev, RCSNode *rcs)
8732 {
8733     char datebuf[MAXDATELEN + 1];
8734     char *label;
8735 
8736     if (rev)
8737     {
8738 	char date[MAXDATELEN + 1];
8739 	/* revs cannot be attached to /dev/null ... duh. */
8740 	assert (strcmp(DEVNULL, path));
8741 	RCS_getrevtime (rcs, rev, datebuf, 0);
8742 	(void) date_to_internet (date, datebuf);
8743 	label = Xasprintf ("-L%s\t%s\t%s", path, date, rev);
8744     }
8745     else
8746     {
8747 	struct stat sb;
8748 	struct tm *wm;
8749 
8750 	if (strcmp(DEVNULL, path))
8751 	{
8752 	    const char *file = last_component (path);
8753 	    if (stat (file, &sb) < 0)
8754 		/* Assume that if the stat fails,then the later read for the
8755 		 * diff will too.
8756 		 */
8757 		error (1, errno, "could not get info for `%s'", path);
8758 	    wm = gmtime (&sb.st_mtime);
8759 	}
8760 	else
8761 	{
8762 	    time_t t = 0;
8763 	    wm = gmtime(&t);
8764 	}
8765 
8766 	(void) tm_to_internet (datebuf, wm);
8767 	label = Xasprintf ("-L%s\t%s", path, datebuf);
8768     }
8769     return label;
8770 }
8771 
8772 
8773 
8774 /*
8775  * Set up a local/custom RCS keyword for expansion.
8776  *
8777  * INPUTS
8778  *   infopath		Path to file being parsed, for error messages.
8779  *   ln			Line number of INFOPATH being processed, for error
8780  *			messages.
8781  *   keywords_in
8782  *   arg
8783  *
8784  * OUTPUTS
8785  *   keywords_in
8786  */
8787 void
8788 RCS_setlocalid (const char *infopath, unsigned int ln,
8789 		void **keywords_in, const char *arg)
8790 {
8791     char *copy, *next, *key, *s;
8792     struct rcs_keyword *keywords;
8793     enum keyword save_expandto;
8794 
8795     if (!*keywords_in)
8796 	*keywords_in = new_keywords ();
8797     keywords = *keywords_in;
8798 
8799     copy = xstrdup (arg);
8800     next = copy;
8801     key = strtok (next, "=");
8802 
8803     /*
8804      * Validate key
8805      */
8806     for (s = key; *s != '\0'; s++)
8807     {
8808 	if (! isalpha ((unsigned char) *s))
8809 	{
8810 	    if (!parse_error (infopath, ln))
8811 		    error (0, 0,
8812 "%s [%u]: LocalKeyword ignored: Bad character `%c' in key `%s'",
8813 			   primary_root_inverse_translate (infopath),
8814 			   ln, *s, key);
8815 	    free (copy);
8816 	    return;
8817 	}
8818     }
8819 
8820     save_expandto = keywords[KEYWORD_LOCALID].expandto;
8821 
8822     /* options? */
8823     while ((key = strtok (NULL, ",")) != NULL) {
8824 	if (!strcmp(key, keywords[KEYWORD_ID].string))
8825 	    keywords[KEYWORD_LOCALID].expandto = KEYWORD_ID;
8826 	else if (!strcmp(key, keywords[KEYWORD_HEADER].string))
8827 	    keywords[KEYWORD_LOCALID].expandto = KEYWORD_HEADER;
8828 	else if (!strcmp(key, keywords[KEYWORD_CVSHEADER].string))
8829 	    keywords[KEYWORD_LOCALID].expandto = KEYWORD_CVSHEADER;
8830 	else
8831 	{
8832 	    keywords[KEYWORD_LOCALID].expandto = save_expandto;
8833 	    if (!parse_error (infopath, ln))
8834 		error (0, 0,
8835 "%s [%u]: LocalKeyword ignored: Unknown LocalId mode: `%s'",
8836 		       primary_root_inverse_translate (infopath),
8837 		       ln, key);
8838 	    free (copy);
8839 	    return;
8840 	}
8841     }
8842 
8843     keywords[KEYWORD_LOCALID].string = xstrdup (next);
8844     keywords[KEYWORD_LOCALID].len = strlen (next);
8845     keywords[KEYWORD_LOCALID].expandit = 1;
8846 
8847     free (copy);
8848 }
8849 
8850 
8851 
8852 void
8853 RCS_setincexc (void **keywords_in, const char *arg)
8854 {
8855     char *key;
8856     char *copy, *next;
8857     bool include = false;
8858     struct rcs_keyword *keyword;
8859     struct rcs_keyword *keywords;
8860 
8861     if (!*keywords_in)
8862 	*keywords_in = new_keywords ();
8863     keywords = *keywords_in;
8864 
8865     copy = xstrdup(arg);
8866     next = copy;
8867     switch (*next++) {
8868 	case 'e':
8869 	    include = false;
8870 	    break;
8871 	case 'i':
8872 	    include = true;
8873 	    break;
8874 	default:
8875 	    free(copy);
8876 	    return;
8877     }
8878 
8879     if (include)
8880 	for (keyword = keywords; keyword->string != NULL; keyword++)
8881 	{
8882 	    keyword->expandit = false;
8883 	}
8884 
8885     key = strtok(next, ",");
8886     while (key) {
8887 	for (keyword = keywords; keyword->string != NULL; keyword++) {
8888 	    if (strcmp (keyword->string, key) == 0)
8889 		keyword->expandit = include;
8890 	}
8891 	key = strtok(NULL, ",");
8892     }
8893     free(copy);
8894     return;
8895 }
8896 
8897 
8898 
8899 #define ATTIC "/" CVSATTIC
8900 static char *
8901 getfullCVSname(char *CVSname, char **pathstore)
8902 {
8903     if (current_parsed_root->directory) {
8904 	int rootlen;
8905 	char *c = NULL;
8906 	int alen = sizeof(ATTIC) - 1;
8907 
8908 	*pathstore = xstrdup(CVSname);
8909 	if ((c = strrchr(*pathstore, '/')) != NULL) {
8910 	    if (c - *pathstore >= alen) {
8911 		if (!strncmp(c - alen, ATTIC, alen)) {
8912 		    while (*c != '\0') {
8913 			*(c - alen) = *c;
8914 			c++;
8915 		    }
8916 		    *(c - alen) = '\0';
8917 		}
8918 	    }
8919 	}
8920 
8921 	rootlen = strlen(current_parsed_root->directory);
8922 	if (!strncmp(*pathstore, current_parsed_root->directory, rootlen) &&
8923 	    (*pathstore)[rootlen] == '/')
8924 	    CVSname = (*pathstore + rootlen + 1);
8925 	else
8926 	    CVSname = (*pathstore);
8927     }
8928     return CVSname;
8929 }
8930